100% found this document useful (1 vote)
417 views272 pages

The Anunnaki and Ulema-Anunnaki - Maximillien de Lafayette

Uploaded by

userr20133
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
100% found this document useful (1 vote)
417 views272 pages

The Anunnaki and Ulema-Anunnaki - Maximillien de Lafayette

Uploaded by

userr20133
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 272

PUBLISHERS’ NOTE:

Do not miss the most EXPLOSIVE book ever written on the


German UFOs and link between the U.S. and the NAZI UFO
technology: “German UFOs Apocalypse Over America. UFOs
World War Three. (Extraterrestrial, Intraterrestrial, German,
Canadian and American UFOs: Origin, Classes, Projects”,
authored by Maximillien de Lafayette.
http://www.amazon.com/Apocalypse-America-Extraterrestrial-Intraterrestrial-
ebook/dp/B008K3TG3G/ref=sr_1_37?
s=books&ie=UTF8&qid=1343201138&sr=1-
37&keywords=maximillien+de+lafayette

*** *** ***


Author’s website
www.maximilliendelafayettebibliography.com
Anunnaki Series

A set of 3 Books
BOOK 2

Copyright ©2012 by Maximillien de Lafayette. All rights reserved. No part of this


book may be used or reproduced by any means, graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
including photocopying, recording, taping or by any information storage retrieval
system without the written permission of the author except in the case of brief
quotations embodied in critical articles and reviews. Date of Publication: July 26,
2012
Published by
UFOs & Supernatural Magazine
New York
The Anunnaki and Ulema-Anunnaki Vault of
Forbidden Knowledge and the Universe’s Greatest
Secrets.
Book 2. 7th Edition

A set of 3 books

Maximillien de Lafayette

*** *** ***


Contributions by
Ulema Mordachai ben Zvi
Ulema Kira Yerma
Ulema Ramash Govinda
Master Li

_____________________

Times Square Press. Elite Associates International

Jamiyat Ramadosh Al-Ulema Al-Anunnaki


New York California London Paris Tokyo
*** *** ***
2012
Acknowledgment and Gratitude

I am deeply grateful to the Honorable Anunnaki-Ulema who have


generously contributed to this book:
Contributors:
Master Li
Ulema Sharif Al Mutawalli
Ulema Mordachai Ben Zvi
Ulema Sadik Bin Jaafar Al Kamali
Ulema F. Oppenheimer
Ulema A. Berkof
Ulema Ramash Govinda
Ulema Tabeth Al-Baydani
Ulema Shaul Sorenztein
Sinhar Ambar Anati
Ulema F. Tayara
Ulema Mirach Faridi Beraz
For without their guidance and contributions, this book would have
remained stacks of papers in my drawer.


Table of Contents (Book 2)

_____________________________________

38. On activating the Conduit, decontaminating or


cleansing ourselves, galactic species in the Milky
Way, galaxy and universe, stargates, invasion of
Iraq, Anunnaki and extraterrestrial spaceships and
UFOs…31
Questions…31
 Question #1: Are the Sumerian gods Enlil, Enki,
Inanna and Marduk still alive and will they be returning
to earth in 2022 or not? (A question I asked Zechariah
Sitchin in person November 2007 but he did not
answer)… 31
 Answer …31
 Question #2: Is it possible for us earth humans to
activate our conduit ourselves here on earth, and if so
what is the technique to do so…32
 Answer …32
 Question #3: When will Sinhar Marduchk's notes for
2022 be published?... 33
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…33
 Question #4: What material / spiritual /lifestyle
changes would we need to make in order to
decontaminate or cleanse ourselves as much as possible
prior to the return in 2022?...33
 Question #5: Is it possible that mind controlling
frequencies can be remotely transmitted into our homes
through devices such as the cable box or TV or other
electronic instruments? Steven Greer's book Hidden
Truth, Forbidden Knowledge says yes…33
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…33
 Question #6: Have you read "Alien Interview"? In it
the EBE says she is a member of the Domain
Expeditionary Force sent from the Domain to explore,
investigate and conquer this part of the galaxy en route
to the galactic center, and claim the Domain to be an
extremely old and very advanced civilization…34
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…34
 Question #7: What do the Annunaki have to say about
other galactic species, how many are they and how much
interaction between species is going on here and
elsewhere in the Milky Way galaxy and universe? …35
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…35
 Question #8: Is there a stargate in New York City?...36
 Answer …36
 Question #9: How many stargates exist across the
planet?...36
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…36
 Question #10: Are there specific times when they can
be used or are they always open?...37
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…37
 Question #11: I heard one of the reasons for the illegal
invasion of Iraq was to shut down their stargates and the
U.S. military has built bases on top of them, as well as
building bases over ancient archaeological sites of
Anunnaki temples/ libraries/ abodes.) …37
 Question #12: Do the home planets of extraterrestrials
visiting/ inhabiting earth exist in higher dimensions
within our own galaxy?...37
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…38
 Question #13: What is the method of propulsion to
travel interdimensionally and what do these ships look
like and consist of? …38
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…38
 Question #14: What are Anunnaki ships made of and
how do they look? …38
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…38
 Question #15: What are Anunnaki ships and
extraterrestrial crafts made of and how do they look? …
38
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…38

39. On sharing the same God with extraterrestrials,


the great book of knowledge, end of our planet, the
truth in the Bible, are the Anunnaki the bad
guys?...45
Questions…45
 Question #1: Do we all share the same god? …45
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…45
 Question #2: Did they make us? …45
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…45
 Question #3: When will we know the full truth? …45
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…45
 Question #4: What is man here for? …45
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…45
 Question #5: Is there a great book of knowledge?... 49
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…49
 Question #6: When will our planet end? …49
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…49
 Question #7: Is the Bible the truth? …49
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…49
 Question #8: Why don't they show them self to people
who seek? …49
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…49
 Question #9: Will humans destroy earth? …50
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…50
 Question #10: The Anunnaki are the bad guys, don’t
you agree? …50
 Answer of the Ulema…50

40. On the Bando Project, and the study of the


anatomy of dead aliens’ bodies, and extraterrestrial
survivors…53
Questions…53
 1. What was the purpose of the Bando Project? …53
 2. Is this secret project still going on? …53
 3. What were the findings and results of the project
 Author’s note/answer…53
 Bando Project …53
 I. Definition and introduction…53
 II. Allegations…53
 III. Former double agent’s claims…54
 IV. The Russian newspaper/website Pravda article…54

41. On “Barage Europa” (Extraterrestrial


tunnels/structures)…59
 Question: I heard once Mr. de Lafayette talking about
Barage Europa. I missed the beginning of his speech.
What did he mean by Barage, and is this Barage related
to extraterrestrial structures on Europa near Jupiter?...
59
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer…59

42. On Bariya, and the Anunnaki’s creation of Man…


63
Questions…63
 Question #1: I can’t read the Sumerian texts to
understand what is going on. I am interested in finding
anything that tells me something about how the
Anunnaki created us? …63
 Question #2: Where are those texts? … 63
 Question #3: And something else, and without any
offense to you, please guide me to authors other than the
Ulema and your group who have found anything on
this…63
 Question #4: And by the way, what did you mean by
Bariya? I read about it in one of your books, and could
not understand a thing.” …63
 Authors’ answers and comments by other scholars…63
 Bariya “Ba-riya’ah” …63
 I. Definition…63
 II. Bariya (The Creation) as described in the Sumerian
texts…63
 III. The creation of humans…64
 Here are additional Akkadian/Sumerian clay tablets
passages on the creation of the Man and pertinent
comments by scholars, historians, linguists and the
authors…64
 Ninlil, the legendary Sumerian “Queen Breeze”
 Marduk was the son of Ea…65
 In the Akkadian/Sumerian epic Enuma Elish, we
read…65
 Inanna was the legendary Sumerian goddess who
created the first 7 prototypes of mankind…65
 The Sumerian-Anunnaki goddess Nammu “Namma”
and her son Enki created multiple forms of humans…66
 Ea killed Kingu, the demon son of Tiamat, and used his
blood to create mankind…66
 Apsu and the creation of man… 66
 From the Sixth Tablet…66
 From the Seventh Tablet…66

43. On Mu, Anunnaki’s interference in Earth’s


affairs, the reptilians, departure and return of the
Anunnaki, God, religions, and life after death…71
Questions…71
 Question #1: MU's connection with the Anunnaki.
What can you tell me about the lost continent of MU? …
71
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…71
 Question #2: Where are the Anunnaki right now and
why don't they interfere on our planet anymore? …73
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…73
 Question #3: We see, nearly every ancient civilization
somehow had some sort of contact with the Anunnaki.
So what did happen after that?…74
 Where did Anunnaki go and why? …74
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…74
 Question #4: Is it true that lots of Earth governments
including US are controlled or ruled by an Alien race
called reptilians? …74
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…74
 Question #5: So, if modern religions are false, is there
a God Almighty? … 74
 Note…74
 Question #6: What does happen to us when we die? …
74
 Note…74
 Question #7: Were the prophets controlled by
Anunnaki or they have manipulated the people as they
wished? … 74
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…74
 Question #8: Do you know anything about old Turks
named Gokturks? …75
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…75
 Question #9: Do you have any knowledge about Turks
and their connection with Anunnaki or Sirius system? …
75
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema…75
 Question #10: In the Lost book of Enki, Zecharia
Sitchin wrote, the mysterious face on Mars (which is still
unaccepted by NASA) was Anunnaki Alalu's graveyard.
Do you know is it true? …76
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulem…76
 Question #11: Are Enlil, Enki, Anu etc. still alive?
 Answer of the authors…76
 Note…76
 Question #12: Can you write some info about you?
Where and when did you born, how did you go and learn
the ways of the Ulema, etc.? … 76
 Answer of the authors…76

44. On teleportation (Barka-kirama)…79


Questions…79
 Question #1: What is the technique called Barka-
kirama, Anunnaki-Ulema use for teleportation? …79
 Question #2: Please define Barka-kirama…79
 Note… 79
 I. Definition…79
 II. In ancient Middle Eastern literature…79
 III. The concept…80
 IV. The Taj Baba’s theory…82
 V. The Tay Al Ard, self-teleportation and concept of the
Alkiramat “Keramat”… 82

45. On the various aliens capabilities of learning


many languages and ways of using their methods to
learn these languages…87
Questions… 87
 Question # 1: How do all the various aliens know so
many of our languages? … 87
 Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette’s answer…87
 Question # 2: Is there a way for us to learn using their
methods?...91
 Answer…91
 Question# 3: It would make the world a much better
place if everyone could understand each other…92
 Answer …92

46. On super tall beings, Coral Castle, Admiral Byrd,


animal mutilations…95
Questions…95
 Question #1: What is known about The Big Boys...the
super, super tall beings that are like no other entities?...
95
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer…95
 Question #2: Who were the beings who lived in the
caves in the American southwest which were discovered
approx. 100 years ago by the Smithsonian explorer?...
96
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer…96
 Question #3: Does Lafayette have any theories as to
how 'coral castle' was built? … 97
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer…97
 Question #4: Does Lafayette have any theories as to the
meaning of the crop circles? … 97
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer…97
 Question #5: What is really going on on the moon? …
98
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer…98
 Question #6: Is there anything to the theories
regarding what Admiral Byrd saw from the plane at the
South Pole and the reports from places like Mt Shasta?
… 98
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer…98
 Question #7: Who or what is really doing the animal
'mutilations' and for what reason? …98
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer…98

47. Rekh-get-Amen, and the Anunnaki-Ulema


Extraordinary Deeds and Faculties…101
 Definition and introduction…101
 II. Unusual deeds by Anunnaki-Ulema as told by an
Ulema novice…101
 1. Introduction: The Anunnaki-Ulema…101
 a- Anunnaki-Ulema, Grand Master Li…102
 b- Anunnaki-Ulema Cheik Al Huseini…103
 c- Anunnaki-Ulema Rabbi Mordechai…103
 II. Stories about the Anunnaki-Ulema…105
 1. Master Li calming down a cobra in the street of
Benares…105
 2. Making a bird from paper…106
 3. Master Li feeding the fish and birds with food that
came from nowhere…108
 4. The Tuareg and the magical coffee cup…110
 5. Folding the space…115
 6. The amazing deeds of Anunnaki-Ulema Mordechai…
118
 Here are some fabulous stories told by Germain
Lumiere who is now visiting Ulema Mordechai in
Budapest, Hungary…132
48. Brain “The Supersymetric Mind”…141
Study of the influence of the Anunnaki’s programming of our
brain and fate…141
 I. Introduction…141
 II. Excerpts from Ulema Sorenztein’s Kira’at…142
 III. The Supersymetric Mind…149
 a. A brief note on supersymetry…149
 b. What is a “Supersymetric Mind”? …149

49. The Duplicate Image or Reproduction of a Being


“Ishra”…153
 I. Definition…153
 II. Ulema Mordechai ben Zvi explains…153

50. Apparition of Dead Pets. Communication with


our Dead Pets “Gensi-uzuru” …155
 I. Introduction…155
 II. Is it possible to communicate with our dead pets? …
155
 III. When your departed loved pet returns to see you…
156
 IV. Excerpts from Master Li’s Kira’at on Gensi-uzuru…
158

51. Levels of the Mind “Iama” …161


 I. Definition and introduction…161
 II. “All humans have more than one brain” …161

52. Interpretation of Messages Sent to the Conduit


“Haridu”, “Haridu-ilmu”…163
 I. Definition…163
 II. Ulema Rabbi Mordechai explains Haridu–Conduit
Equation …163

53. Plasmic Halo Surrounding the Physical Body


“Hatani”…169
 I. Definition…169
 II. The concept…169
 III. The Hatani “Protection Shield” …170
 IV. Hatani and Khuch “Kush-Ra”: Protection against
physical threats and harms…173

54. Shape-shifting “Ibra-Anu” …177


 I. Definition and introduction…177
 II. Anunnaki’s shape-shifting…177

55. Bringing Youth to Your Face. “Hatori-shabah” …


179
 I. Definition…179
 II. Ulema Suleiman Al Bak’r explains the concept…179

56. The Ability of Observing Entities Fluctuation


“Idartari” …181
 I. Definition…181
 II. Pets and children ability to see non-physical
entities…181
57. Extraterrestrials in the Book of Ramadosh
“Ezakarfalki”, “E-zakar-falki”…185
 I. Definition and introduction…185
 II. Evolution of the extraterrestrials and the human
races…186
 III. Extraterrestrial races populated the Earth…186
 IV. Extraterrestrials of the sea (Underwater) …186
 V. Senses of the extraterrestrials…187
 VI. Talking to extraterrestrials…187

58. The First stage of the Afterlife “Hattari”…190


 I. Definition…190
 II. Description…190

59. The Fourth Dimension “Chabkaradi”…195


 I. Definition…195
 II. Explanation…195

60. State of the Human Mind After Death “Zrah-


Amru”…199
 I. Definition…199
 II. The Ulema explain…199

61. Anunnaki’s Device for Reading and Deciphering


Codes and Symbols “Hazi-minzar”, “Mnaizar” …202
 I. Definition…202
 II. Description…202
 III. The text …202

62. Entities Created by the Anunnaki, and the Ulema


in Modern Times “Helama-Gooliim”…211
 I. Definition and introduction…211
 II. Their nature and essence…211
 III. The creation process of these entities…212

63. Folding-Unfolding the Earth “Hiraaba-safri”…


215
 Ulema Cheik Al Kabir explained…215

64. Longevity of Quasi-Human-Life Form “Izra-


nafar-mikla’ch”…217
 I. Definition…217
 II. The Anunnaki-Ulema explain…217

65. Immortality After Death “Izrahi-ghafra” …219


 I. Definition…219
 II. The Anunnaki-Ulema explain…219

66. Columns “charged” with Anunnaki’s


Supernatural Powers “Jachim”, “Jachin”…222
 Two large cast-bronze pillars in the Temple of
Solomon…222
 I. Definition and introduction…222
 II. Ulema’s interpretation…222
67. Abbreviation of Yahweh “Jah”, “Yah”…225
 I. Definition…225
 II. In Ana’kh/Ulemite literature…225

68. Anunnaki’s Sex and Reproduction “Jin.Si-Yah”


…227
 I. Introduction…227
 II. Hybrids…227
 III. Major points about the subject…228

69. Short Mental Projection of the Self “Ka”…229


 I. Definition…229
 II. Ka and the Egyptians…229

70. Multiple Dimensions’ Dividing Lines “Kalem” …


231
 Definition…231

71. Center of Energy “Kama”…233


 I. Definition…233
 II. In Hebrew, esoterica and Kabala…233

72. Etheric Manifestation “Karsha-bita”…235


 I. Definition…235
 II. The bird as a symbol of the soul…235

73. Hybrids’ Dwellings “Korashag “Khur-Shag”…239


 I. Definition and introduction…239
 II. Description of the hybrids’ habitat…239
 a- Human environment…240
 b- Underground/underwater communities…240
 III. Characteristics…240
 Bedrooms, beds, toys, dining rooms, food, and eating
habits…241
 IV. Hybrid children habitat as described by an
Anunnaki…241
 a. Inside the base…241
 b. The refectory…242
 c. Hybrids’ three distinct groups/categories…243
 d. Hybrids placed for adoption…243
 e. Disposing of the food and cleaning the refectory…
244
 f. Dormitories and sleeping quarters…244
 g. Attending various activities…245
 h. The fetuses’ room…247

74. Physical manifestation of a dead person, before


entering another dimension “Kusir and Lalladu” …
249
 1. Introduction…249
 2. Kusir and Lalladu…250
 a. Meaning of Kusir…250
 Kusir-Ra…250
 Kusir-Ji…250
 b. Meaning of Lalladu…251

75. Reading Past, Present, and Future Events From


the Life of one Single Person “La-abrida”, “Bzi’ra-
irdu”…261
 1. Definition and introduction…261
 2. Synopsis of mode of operation…263
 3. The beginning of everything; multiples existences
and “God’s Particle” …264
 4. La-abrida “Bzi’ra-irdu”; is it a tool to go back in time
or jump into the future? …266
 Is it a tool to go back in time or jump into the future? …
266
 5. Can I use La-abrida“Bzi’ra-irdu” to ameliorate my
life, and change my destiny? …267
 6. Revisiting your childhood in another dimension, in
another time…270
 7. The invisible and thin quantum line dividing two
space-time dimensions…274
 8. Q&A …276

76. Spathe of the Male Date-Palm “Lagishimmar”,


“Lagi-zulum”…281
 Also called the deity’s hand-bucket…281
 1. Definition and introduction…281
 2. Symbolism…283
 3. Esoteric and magical use…284
77. A tool to Rewind the Past and the Future
“Lamada-burkadi”…287
 Definition…287

78. Metaphysical Visual Stethoscope “Lamadru”…


289
 Definition…289

79. Announcement of your Death “Latabi”, “Ma-ari”


…291
 I. Definition…291
 II. Ulema Al Baydani explains…291

80. The Image of the Bodies of People Who Have


Passed Away “Lakur-bashar-shabah”, “Mah.Ga.Ri”
…293
 I. Definition…293
 II. Etymology…293

81. Reappearance of Objects which are no longer in


Existence…295
Lakur-shabah”, “Mah.Ri.Nag”…295
 I. Definition…295
 II. Etymology…295

*** *** ***


38. On activating the Conduit, decontaminating or
cleansing ourselves, galactic species in the Milky
Way, galaxy and universe, stargates, invasion of
Iraq, Anunnaki and extraterrestrial spaceships and
UFOs



 Question #1: Are the Sumerian gods Enlil, Enki,


Inanna and Marduk still alive and will they be returning
to earth in 2022 or not? (A question I asked Zechariah
Sitchin in person November 2007 but he did not
answer)
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #2: Is it possible for us earth humans to
activate our conduit ourselves here on earth, and if so
what is the technique to do so
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #3: When will Sinhar Marduchk's notes for
2022 be published?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #4: What material / spiritual /lifestyle
changes would we need to make in order to
decontaminate or cleanse ourselves as much as possible
prior to the return in 2022?
 Question #5: Is it possible that mind controlling
frequencies can be remotely transmitted into our homes
through devices such as the cable box or TV or other
electronic instruments? Steven Greer's book Hidden
Truth, Forbidden Knowledge says yes
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #6: Have you read "Alien Interview"? In it
the EBE says she is a member of the Domain
Expeditionary Force sent from the Domain to explore,
investigate and conquer this part of the galaxy en route
to the galactic center, and claim the Domain to be an
extremely old and very advanced civilization
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #7: What do the Annunaki have to say about
other galactic species, how many are they and how much
interaction between species is going on here and
elsewhere in the Milky Way galaxy and universe?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #8: Is there a stargate in New York City?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #9: How many stargates exist across the
planet?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #10: Are there specific times when they can
be used or are they always open?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #11: I heard one of the reasons for the illegal
invasion of Iraq was to shut down their stargates and the
U.S. military has built bases on top of them, as well as
building bases over ancient archaeological sites of
Anunnaki temples/ libraries/ abodes.)
 Question #12: Do the home planets of extraterrestrials
visiting/ inhabiting earth exist in higher dimensions
within our own galaxy?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #13: What is the method of propulsion to
travel interdimensionally and what do these ships look
like and consist of?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema

 Question #14: What are Anunnaki ships made of and


how do they look?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #15: What are Anunnaki ships and
extraterrestrial crafts made of and how do they look?
 Note
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema

_________________________
38. On activating the Conduit, decontaminating or
cleansing ourselves, galactic species in the Milky
Way, galaxy and universe, stargates, invasion of
Iraq, Anunnaki and extraterrestrial spaceships and
UFOs

Questions by A.M., New York.

Question #1: Are the Sumerian gods Enlil, Enki, Inanna and
Marduk still alive and will they be returning to earth in 2022 or not?
(A question I asked Zechariah Sitchin in person November 2007 but
he did not answer)

Answer of Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette:

 1. Enlil, Enki, Inanna and Marduk do not represent the whole


hierarchy, and leadership of the Anunnaki. They are the
Anunnaki Sinhars who landed on Earth, similar to other
Anunnaki leaders who visited other worlds, galaxies, stars and
planets.
 2. The Anunnaki have visited 7 galaxies and interacted with
hundreds upon hundreds of different and highly advanced
extraterrestrial civilizations. They are all over the universe.
 3. Millions of them traverse the universe and its multiple
zones freely and regularly.
 4. By life-span standards of the Anunnaki, Enlil, Enki, Inanna
and Marduk are relatively young. For, Anunnaki have a very
long longevity.
 4. Some Anunnaki live 450,000 years, until the last cell or
molecule in their mind and body deteriorates.
 5. In some instances, the Anunnaki can self-reproduce
themselves, and add more years to their longevity. So, the
answer is yes, they are still alive.
 5. Are they returning to Earth in 2022? According to Ulema
Sadiq bin Bakri Al Ansari (512 year old and still alive), and
honorable Master Li (217 year old and still alive), and as stated
by Ulema Mordechai ben Zvi (270 year old and still alive),
Sinhar Inannascharma and Sinhar Marduchk will lead the
Anunnaki’s return to Earth in 2022.
 6. Their return to Earth has been already announced in the
Anunnaki Matrix.
 6. We also know where the Anunnaki shall land on planet
Earth, and what assignments are already given to other leaders
and commanders.
 7. Some will be very peaceful, others alarming.

*** *** ***

Question #2: Is it possible for us earth humans to activate our


Conduit ourselves here on earth, and if so what is the technique to do
so.

Answer of Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette:

 1. No, it is not possible.


 2. You need to study with an Anunnaki-Ulema.
 3. However, you can partially active one zone in your Araya
through the “Transmission of the Mind” technique, and other
techniques such as:
 a- The Abgaru introspection, if guided by an adept;
 b- The Anshekadoora-abra technique;
 c-The Afkir-r’-Tanawar, so on.
Note: These techniques, as well as other techniques and orientation
training are fully discussed in de Lafayette’s book “The Forbidden
Book of Ramadosh.” The Spanish edition book was translated by
Laura Lebron.

*** *** ***


Question #3: When will Sinhar Marduchk's notes for 2022 be
published?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:

 1. Sinhar Ambar Anati has authorized the release of the


“Mouza-Karaat of Sinhar Marduchk” (Notes/Diary of Sinhar
Marduchk). It is our plan to publish the Mouza-Karaat before
the last quarter of 2009.
 2. The publication shall contain both the original notes as
prescribed in Ana’kh (The Anunnaki’s language), and the
translation in English.
 3. Some chapters shall contain transliteration as well.

*** *** ***

Question #4: What material /spiritual /lifestyle changes would we


need to make in order to decontaminate or cleanse ourselves as
much as possible prior to the return in 2022?

Note:
To answer to this question, would require pages upon pages, and
intensive/extensive lists of prerequisites.
Ulema de Lafayette has already answered a major part of these
questions in many of his books.

*** *** ***

Question #5: Is it possible that mind controlling frequencies can be


remotely transmitted into our homes through devices such as the
cable box or TV or other electronic instruments?
Steven Greer's book Hidden Truth, Forbidden Knowledge says yes.
Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:
 Absolutely. Dr. Greer told the truth.

Question #6: Have you read "Alien Interview"? In it the EBE says
she is a member of the Domain Expeditionary Force sent from the
Domain to explore, investigate and conquer this part of the galaxy en
route to the galactic center, and claim the Domain to be an extremely
old and very advanced civilization.

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


 1. We do not read material and work written by humans.
 2. However, we are fully aware that 99.99% of what has been
written and said by Western authors and ufologists (Especially
in the United States of America) about the Anunnaki, their
history, other galactic civilizations, the origin of Man, alien
technology, parallel dimensions, and non terrestrial spacecrafts
were false, silly, and childish. Especially those so-called
messages received from the stars, telepathic communications
with extraterrestrials, and channeling with “Higher Beings”.
 3. The cosmic universe and its Two Wheels of Harmony do
not function in this manner.
 4. You have to understand (and get used to, and once for good
and for ever), that extraterrestrials do not mingle with people
in their homes, do not volunteer to provide galactic
information, messages and instruction, do not telepathically
communicate with individuals (Except in those rare cases of
abductions by the Grays) to announce and/or to deliver any
sort and any kind of revelations, messages, warnings,
teachings, and instruction. They do NOT!
 5. It is these sorts/kinds of claims, idiotic and childish
statements, false reports, arrogant assumptions, bizarre
theories about aliens and alien encounters, badmouthing few
honest writers who touched the face of the truth but were
ridiculed or maliciously attacked by ignorant and vindictive
people, the totally untruthful and fabricated statements and
accounts reported or given by so-called experiencers and
messengers, the self-serving and egoistic ufologists, self-
proclaimed researchers, so-called field investigators, the
fraudulent mediums/contactors, twisted accounts from
abductees and alleged contactees, the ridiculous channelers,
and fake psychics that destroy the credibility of ufology! The
world/field of ufology is unhealthy! Ufology has become a
religion; a dangerous cult!

*** *** ***

Question #7: What do the Annunaki have to say about other


galactic species, how many are they and how much interaction
between species is going on here and elsewhere in the Milky Way
galaxy and universe?

Answer of Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette:

 1. There are millions upon millions upon millions of all kinds,


categories and levels of galactic civilizations in the universe.
 2. And the universe encompasses so many layers of :

a- Existences,
b- Dimensions,
c- Spheres,
d- Zones,
e- Species,
f- Past worlds,
g- Present worlds,
h- Future worlds,
i- All kinds of space-time memories and projections,
j- Mind-matter-anti-matter manifestations,
k- Vibrational beings and life-forms,
l- Multidimensional beings and life-forms,
m- Intradimensional beings and life-forms,
n- Extraterrestrial beings and life-forms,
o- Intraterrestrial beings and life-forms,
p- Holographic entities, beings and life-forms.
It is a very very complex and complicated universe, and not always
welcoming and peaceful.

*** *** ***

Question #8: Is there a stargate in New York City?


Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:
 Absolutely.

*** *** ***

Question #9: How many stargates exist across the planet?

Answer of Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette:

 1. First, it is extremely important to understand or to try to


understand the major characteristics, properties and enormous
differences between:
 a- Gateway(s);
 b- Ba’ab(s);
 c- Time-pocket(s);
 d- Space pocket(s);
 e- Mad-khal(s);
 f- Mikh-Raaj(s);
 g- Stargate(s);
 h-Space diving lines;
 i- Time dividing lines;
 j- Intersections of multiple layers of the universe, etc…
 2. Even though all of the above are separately grouped under
“Stargates”.

Note: (a) to (j) are discussed, and explained step-by-step, and at


length in de Lafayette’s book “The Anunnaki Ulema Final Warning:
Humanity destiny, UFOs threat, and the extraterrestrials final
solution.Revised”

 2. There are 70 “Gateways-Stargates” across/around planet


Earth.
 3. Not all of them serve the same purpose.
 4. Not all of them function, open and close in the very same
manner.

*** *** ***


Question #10: Are there specific times when they can be used or
are they always open?

Answer of Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette:


 1. Stargates/Gateways/Ba’abs function, open, and close
according to a Matrix that establishes:
 a- Specific times;
 b- Specific entrances and exists called respectively Mad-
khal(s) and Mikh-Raaj(s);
 c- Mass, matter and anti-matter.
 2. Stargates, Gateways, and Ba’abs are not always open,
because a permanent “opening” will create cosmic
catastrophes.
 3. A permanent “opening” will suck up everything that exists
in its perimeter, like the black holes.
 4. A permanent or quasi-permanent “opening” will de-
fragment, disintegrate, and annihilate molecules, space
boundaries, particles, atoms, matter and mass, including dark
energy, and “God Particle”.
 5. Should these de-fragmentations, disintegrations, and
annihilations occur, the universe will cease to exist.

*** *** ***

Question #11: I heard one of the reasons for the illegal invasion of
Iraq was to shut down their stargates and the U.S. military has built
bases on top of them, as well as building bases over ancient
archaeological sites of Anunnaki temples/ libraries/ abodes.)

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


 Nonsense!

*** *** ***

Question #12: Do the home planets of extraterrestrials visiting/


inhabiting earth exist in higher dimensions within our own galaxy?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


 Yes and way beyond.

*** *** ***

Question #13: What is the method of propulsion to travel


interdimensionally?

Question # 14: And what do these ships look like and consist of?
Author’s note: Answers to these two questions were provided in
several books I have written. It is even impossible to summarize
herewith pertinent information and findings.
Besides, it will take so many pages in this book. Please email me and
I will refer you to the books dealing with your questions.
Email: [email protected]

*** *** ***

Question #15: What are Anunnaki ships and extraterrestrial crafts


made of and how do they look?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:

 1. The UFOs and USOs are the spaceships of the Grays who
live here on Earth and underwater.
 2. They are made from special metal and a blend of
material/substances totally unknown to humans.
 3. They are “coated” with:
 a- Protection shields;
 b- Anti-matter frames;
 c- Invisibility belts;
 d- Anti-gravity circumferences;
 e- Anti-metal fatigue, and anti-erosion properties, thus
allowing them to jump from time pocket to another time
pocket, and from space pocket to another space pocket. These
maneuvers explain their erratic, irregular “flying” (In fact, they
do not fly, they jump) pattern and sharp and sudden angular
turns and spiral acceleration.
 4. They come in all shapes and forms ranging from:
 a- Circular;
 b- Conical (Conic);
 c- Triangular;
 d- Crescent;
 e- Half crescent; and half crescent with an angular tail;
 f- Cigar shape;
 g- Spheroids, also called “Flattened Spheres”;
 h- Rings;
 i- Balls of lights;
 j- Oval;
 k- Egg shape;
 l- Diamond shape;
 m- Lampshade shape;
 n- Cylindrical;
 o- Probes;
 p- Small carriers;
 5. Grays UFOs and USOs have a multitude of spectral colors
and shades such as:
 a- Bluish in day time;
 b- Bluish-grayish in day time;
 c- Orange in day time;
 d- Reflective in day time;
 e- Shiny (Aluminum-Silver-Chrome colors);
 f- Luminous in the dark or night time;
 g- Extremely bright in the dark or night time;
 h- Different and constantly changing colors from burning
magnesium to fluorescent blue-green, in the dark or night time;
 i- Sudden alteration/variation from greenish-blue to red-
orange, with intense white-blue underside or under the “belly”
of the craft, in the dark or night time;
 j- The total spectral colors (Range and intensity) range from
silver to red, yellow, orange, green, violet and blue.
 6- They emit various gases, to name a few:
 Hydrogen;
 Acetylene;
 Translucent plasma;
 Helium;
 Oxygen;
 Carbon dioxide;
 Argon;
 Krypton, so on…
 7- They produce several physical, mental, emotional,
psychological, psycho-somatic and bio-organic effects on
human beings, animals, and the environment, to name a few:
 a- An intense heat;
 b- Continuous increase of temperature;
 c- Radio active emission and rays;
 d- Paralysis;
 e- Immobilization;
 f- Vision impairment;
 g- Burning the skin;
 h- Laps of memory;
 i- Difficulty in breathing;
 j- Lost of consciousness;
 k- Electrical shocks;
 l- Cars engines stop to work;
 m- Vehicles motors misfire;
 n- Headlamps regularly went out;
 o- Emission of electromagnetic energy;
 p- Painful pricklings;
 q- Disruption of electrical circuits;
 r- Amnesia;
 s- Headache;
 t-Eye pains;
 u- Nausea; so on…
 8. The Anunnaki ships called Merkaba and Markaba are
completely different from the UFOs and USOs you see in the
skies.
 a- They are much much bigger;
 b- They are always accompanied by a mother-ship that stays
around the orbit of the Earth;
 c-The mother-ship houses multiple and smaller crafts, usually
stored in the lowest section (Belly) of the mother-ship;
 d- They produce a loud sound when they take off from a land-
base;
 e- The spaceship top section has a dome made from
translucent material, resembling a diamond ring;
 f- This upper section (At the very top) of the spaceship serve
as a navigation and control command center;
 g- Below the crystal ring, there are four to five circular and
parallel compartments connected to the main engine of the
craft;
 h- I have used the word “Engine” for lack of proper
terminology, because alien spaceships of any category do not
have engines or motors, some time, the whole craft serves as a
propulsion catalyst.
 i- The larger Anunnaki spaceships are noted for their arched
back side.
 j- The lower part or level of the spaceship have circular rings
rotating independently from each other; these rings when they
start to spin, they produce the lift, activate the spiral (Oval or
circular) propulsion system, and instantly neutralize gravity.
 k- To the human eyes, the rings appear like wide-spread
wings and/or a helicopter blade;
 i- The central/lower wheel (the fifth one) spins at a great
speed;
 j- All wheels spin independently from each other in different
directions; there is no synchronization in their motion and
circular rotation;
 k- From the lower part of the spaceship (Belly), extend four
rectangular sections that change to oval shape, when the craft
has reached an altitude of 200 feet;
 l- On take off, these four sections remain inside the body of
the craft. But when the craft lands, they “emerge” from the
body of the craft to provide support for landing, even though
they never touch the ground;
 m- These four sections are sometime called the “Legs of the
ship”’ they are clearly visible to the naked eyes, because they
look like long, extended and straight forks, brightly polished, of
a golden or amber color that changes to highly polished brass
color;
 n- Fraction of seconds, before the craft lands while still
hovering in a semi-circular motion, the “legs” of the ship begin
to rotate on their own axis, and the very end or extremity of the
legs become flat;
 o- The spaceship does not a cockpit or a flight deck for
obvious reasons.
 p- The entrance gate or door of the ship is never visible at first
sight. The gate or the door opens and closes in a revolving
manner.
 q- Once, the door or the gate stops to rotate, a sort of an
extended rail (consisting of several lined up rectangular
sections attached to each other by very thin rows of tubes)
extends from the lower body of the ship, and its extension
suddenly widens, and opens up to reveal a circular
entrance/exit.

Note: This was a very brief descriptive summary of the exterior of


the craft. To learn more on the interior of the craft, the
compartments of the pilots and passengers, the vault that contains
the main apparatus, the navigation instruments, the prime
operation room, the ammunitions and weapons system, etc., you
have to read the scientific report on all types of Markaba. Again,
you have dig out this report in various chapters of my previously
published books.

*** *** ***


39. On sharing the same God with
extraterrestrials, the great book of knowledge,
end of our planet, the truth in the Bible, are the
Anunnaki the bad guys?


 Question #1: Do we all share the same god?


 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #2: Did they make us?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #3: When will we know the full truth?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #4: What is man here for?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #5: Is there a great book of knowledge?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #6: When will our planet end?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #7: Is the Bible the truth?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #8: Why don't they show them self to people
who seek?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #9: Will humans destroy earth?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #10: The Anunnaki are the bad guys, don’t
you agree?
 Answer of the Ulema

39. On sharing the same God with extraterrestrials,


the great book of knowledge, end of our planet, the
truth in the Bible, are the Anunnaki the bad guys?

Note: Questions from Jamie Havican


Questions:

Question #1: Do we all share the same god?


Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:
 No.

*** *** ***

Question #2: Did they make us?


Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:
 Affirmative.

*** *** ***

Question #3: When will we know the full truth?


Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:
 Not before 2021 or 2022.

*** *** ***


Question #4: What is man here for?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


 1. The answer depends on your religious beliefs.
 2. Your priest, pastor, rabbi, cheik and other religious
dignitaries, figures and preachers have already handy and well-
crafted answers.
 3. But you got to remember that religions for centuries and
centuries fought knowledge, science, astronomy, physics,
mathematics, cosmology, autopsy, medicine, jailed, exiled and
killed scientists.
 4. By the name of God, and faith, they burned hundreds of
thousands of people in public places, mutilated their bodies in
tortures donjons, and refused them burial rites.
 5. The answer also depends on the person you are addressing
the question.
 6. Is she or is he a traditional scientist, an avant garde
futurist, a physician, a cosmologist, an anthropologist, a
psychologist, a metaphysic teacher, a qauntum physics
professor, a raconteur, an elementary school teacher in Texas
or Barbados, a spiritual medium, a psychic to the stars, a
colorful channeler, a Biblical scholar, a mental case nerd
posting hilarious stuff on the Internet, an expert in ancient
languages? Or something else?
 7. Theories and assumptions on the subject are endless!
 8. To tell you the truth, only few people and beings of any
dimension knew why you are here and where you are going,
and where you will end up; here are some names:
 a- The Anunnaki because they have created you,
 b- The Igigi because they have witnessed your genetic
creation in the Chimiti (Laboratories, tubes, containers) of the
Anunnaki,
 c- Few other galactic races like the Lyrians, the Nordics, the
Zeta Reticulians, because they have discussed your faculties,
mental and bio-organic “properties”, nature and especially your
possible admittance into the Federation of Light and its Majliss
(Council), following the initiative of the Anunnaki.
 d- The early Phoenician, Arwadian cosmologists, and the
offspring of the Anunnaki, and few of their remnants.
 e- The Anunnaki-Ulema.

*** *** ***

Remember that other humans (More exactly quasi-humans and


other semi intelligent life-forms) were already here on Earth, long
before the Anunnaki and/or any other extraterrestrial races visited
Earth, and the idea or concept of “God” were known to mankind.

Ulema de Lafayette said: Some were the product and results of:
a- Photosynthesis,
b- Metabolism,
c- Bio-organic metamorphosis,
d- Cosmic dust,
e- Space particles,
f- Galactic molecules,
g- Space bubbles,
h- Meteors containing blocks of life,
i- Multiple universes collisions,
j- Genetic manipulations,
k- Several evolutionary processes, you name it.

Those people, entities and life-forms did not know where they were
here, and why they were created; they did not even know on what
dimension they lived. And even the Anunnaki themselves did not
know what they were here on Earth, and what were the purposes and
reasons for their existence.
But the Anunnaki know very well why the early prototypes of
Bashars (Humans) and the final product of their experimental
genetic manipulations that shaped up the final shape of modern
humans were created, and what purposes they must verve.
They created you to as labor manpower, as a work force, as machines
and robots to work the fields, to feed them, to serve them, etc.
All these ideas and reasons are documented in the poems, epics, and
tales they left us, and which were recorded in the
Akkadian/Sumerian clay tablets, and the cosmogony of the early
Phoenicians.
But things became to change, when the Anunnaki started to show
interest in the human race, and manifest affection toward your
ancestors. Especially, when the early humans were allowed to mix
with their women and men, and more precisely, when the Anunnaki
began to marry Earth’s women and father their children.
At that particular moment in history, the Anunnaki changed their
plans for the human race, and improved their mental and physical
faculties. Instead of the 13 primordial faculties they “inserted” in
their brains and bodies, The Anunnaki added more faculties and
capabilities, such as writing poetry, composing music, erecting cities,
mapping the skies, establishing rules for their communities,
developing sophisticated irrigation systems, discovering mineralogy,
etc.
And when the Anunnaki discovered (to their greatest delight and
surprise) that humans after all are not so inferior and limited in their
imagination, endurance and creativity, the Anunnaki decided on a
new fate, a new destiny, and new role for humanity on the landscape
of the universe, this dimension and the ones before:

The new fate, the destiny and the new role of humans beings can be
summarized as follows:

 a-The Anunnaki will develop for the human beings, a gradual


and systematic plan to reach the ultimate level of awareness,
understanding of the universe, and living in absolute harmony
and elegant synchronization with the cosmos;
 b-The Anunnaki will guide humanity toward the ultimate
purpose and target of the creation, when they reach higher
dimensions of existence: Perpetual happiness, peace, love,
quasi-immortality, a state of mind free of illness, diseases,
financial worries, aggression, wars, physical pain, ignorance,
and above all the attainment of “Ra-hat Dae-mat”, which
means state of perfection and perpetual knowledge.

This is what is going to be the fate of all humans. They were not
created and placed on Earth to accomplish and attain all these
wonderful things, but finally, the Anunnaki decided to facilitate the
process by which all humans can reach ultimate peace, knowledge
and happiness.
Nobody else in the whole universe will stand by the human race to
achieve this, except the Anunnaki.
The Anunnaki are humanity’s only hope and salvation.

*** *** ***

Question #5: Is there a great book of knowledge?


Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:
 The Book of Ramadosh.

*** *** ***

Question #6: When will our planet end?


Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema.
Ulema Oppenheimer said:
 1. Soon or later, the world will come to an end.
 2. The end of Earth is some 7.5 billion to 7.6 years from now.
*** *** ***

Question #7: Is the Bible the truth?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema


Ulema Mordechai ben Zvi said:
 1. Not everything in the Bible is factual.
 2. Some passages are the product of a vivid imagination and
very colorful fabrication, such as the Genesis, the story of the
creation of Adam and Eve, the Exodus, the Ten
Commandments; the story of Jericho; The story of Sodom and
Gomorra, so on.
 3. Generally speaking, the Bible is a beautiful piece of
literature.

*** *** ***

Question #8: Why don't they show themselves to people who seek?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema


Ulema Mordechai ben Zvi said:

 1. They did! The two big questions remain: Who are the true
seekers? Who are those who are entitled to?
 2. They have revealed themselves to the Mounawariin
(Enlightened ones), to the Taa-’hiriin (The Pure ones), and to
the Anunnaki-Ulema.
 3. It is not enough to seek. You have to be 100% pure in
thoughts, feelings, intentions and deeds.
 4. And your mind’s Araya and Conduit must be fully
activated.
 5. Are the Mounawariin 100% pure? Yes, they are. And is it
possible to reach perfection and ultimate purity on Earth
and/or in other dimensions? Yes, it is possible. We are not
talking here about physical purity and physical perfection, but
about the mental/spiritual ones.
 6. How could you reach these ultimate standards of perfection
and purity?
 7. The Anunnaki-Ulema have taught for centuries, and still
teach relevant techniques and methods.

*** *** ***

Question #9: Will humans destroy earth?


Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
Ulema Oppenheimer said:
 No!

*** *** ***

Question #10: The Anunnaki are the bad guys.


Don’t you agree?
 Author’s answer: Do you still think so? Read, and read, and
read again this book, and you will change your mind. And if you
are still unconvinced, read the “Book of Ramdosh”.

*** *** ***

40. On the Bando Project, and the study of the


anatomy of dead aliens’ bodies, and
extraterrestrial survivors

 1. What was the purpose of the Bando Project?
 2. Is this secret project still going on?
 3. What were the findings and results of the project
 Author’s note/answer
 Bando Project
 I. Definition and introduction
 II. Allegations
 III. Former double agent’s claims
 (CIA, KGB, MI5, Moscow Academy of Medicine)
 V. The Russian newspaper/website Pravda article

____________________________
40. On the Bando Project, and the study of the
anatomy of dead aliens’ bodies, and extraterrestrial
survivors

Note: Questions sent by Emanuel Pravo, Milan, Italy.


Questions:
 1. What was the purpose of the Bando Project?
 2. Is this secret project still going on?
 3. What were the findings and results of the project
Author’s note: No need to ask the Anunnaki-Ulema, for I have
addressed the issue in my previous books. Here are some brief
excerpts:

Bando Project:
I. Definition and introduction
II. Allegations
III. Former double agent’s claims
(CIA, KGB, MI5, Moscow Academy of Medicine)
V. The Russian newspaper/website Pravda article

________________

I. Definition and introduction:


Project Bando was established in 1949, for the purpose of studying
the anatomy of dead aliens’ bodies, and extraterrestrial survivors
who were found on the site of two alleged UFO’s crashes in the
United States. Allegedly, CIA’s files show that Bando Project
medically examined aliens, named in the CIA’s report as EBE
(Extraterrestrial Biological Entities).
The Project supplied the United States government with “essential
medical and anatomic data on aliens, and provided some answers to
the theory of evolution.” The program was allegedly terminated in
1974.

II. Allegations:
Insiders claimed that Bando Project is an “on going process” under
various names; one of them is called Project Nomad. An insider
alleged that FBI director J. Edgar Hoover called the CIA and wrote to
them many times, asking for “copies of the report on the recovery of
the aliens’ bodies, and the medical report of the examinations of the
EBEs.”

The insider added, “The Director was so upset…he got nothing from
them, then the CIA told the Director to make a call to Gen X., who
was in charge of the project.
They gave him his name and telephone number. The CIA told the
Director that they had no interest in all this. The Director called the
base and he spoke to the general. I don’t know what they talked
about. Later on, we learned that the bodies of the aliens were in the
Blue Room…”

III. Former double agent’s claims:


(CIA, KGB, MI5, Moscow Academy of Medicine):
In 1978, a former double agent (Now in retirement in Budapest) said
(In his own words): “The CIA people were working on the Bando
Project, and did medical examination of the bodies of the dead aliens
at Langley. I know that because the KGB infiltrated the CIA, and one
of our agents (Meaning a Russian) knew all about it.
He reported to the KGB and to Moscow Academy of Medicine.
Something else I can tell you, they made two films of the autopsy and
another fake one. At the beginning we did not know which film was
the real one.
The fake copy was well-done, professionally looking.
The Moscow Academy of Science got a copy of one of the films. Later,
a colonel from the KGB sold a copy of the film to MI5 (UK’s security
intelligence agency) for $10,000. I know this happened, because I
saw a slip deposit from Moscow Narodny Bank.

IV. The Russian newspaper Pravda account:


Ironically, perhaps coincidently, in 2004, the semi-official Russian
Pravda newspaper published the following article (As is, unedited,
and as it appeared in its English version.
Do you remember that 10 years ago the old black-and-white film
about the postmortem examination of the alien in the USA in 1947
was broadcast all over the world?

Headline: CIA and KGB were fighting for alien’s dead body.
Text: Americans did their best to persuade the world that the film
was a forgery, but failed. The tape, the camera, the medical
examiners’ instruments – all this was authentic”, says Boris
Shurinov, Chairman of the Russian UFO Society.

He has been collecting the materials on UFOs for many years. To


distract people from their film, Americans made another one – about
the postmortem examination of the alien in the Soviet Union.
"The idea of the movie with James Bond as its main character was
about “flying saucer’s” crash in the USSR, and all the footage of the
incident was allegedly banned from the public by KGB.
Then the brave Americans purchased this secret archive from the
corrupted Russians to familiarize public with it”, says Boris
Shurinov. "According to the movie, the disc fell down near the city of
Sverdlovsk in November, 1968. They found it in March, 1969, KGB
people arrived, the spot was encircled”.
"I conducted investigation and discovered that the movie was a
forgery. I found out that the “secret filming of 1969 took place in
1998 in the base of Mosfilm company in the town of Alabino,
Moscow region. “The flying saucer was made of foam plastic”, says
Mr. Shurinov."
I even discovered that the filming of the “alien dissection” took place
in Moscow Academy of Medicine, and even found the desk the
“alien” was put on.
After that, at many international conferences of UFOs, I denounced
this forged movie and the key liar – US expert on UFOs Paul
Stonehill. However, I was not successful, as they called me a KGB
man and anti-Semite (as Mr. Stonehill is a Jew, and I was
denouncing him)”.
According to Boris Shurinov, "95 per cent of the stories on UFOs are
lies, but there is a fraction of truth in them. Americans faced this
problem in the mid-40s. In 1942, US President Roosevelt received a
note about a sudden air-raid warning:

On February 25 many flying objects appeared in the sky over Los


Angeles, air defense forces decided that these were Japanese
aircrafts and started shooting at them, but missed all the targets.
In 1947, US press registered more than 850 cases of UFO
observation mentioning.
Americans started accusing the Soviet Union of testing its new
aircrafts over the US territory. Soviet Vice Consulate had to make a
statement that “the USSR respects the sovereignty of all the states,
and no way it could use other countries’ territory as a testing ground.
The Soviet Union has more than enough on its own territory for
conducting scientific research”. At some point, as the interest in
UFOs was growing, UFO “experts” were inventing more and more
stories, and it became hard to distinguish real stories from lies.

*** *** ***

41. On “Barage Europa” (Extraterrestrial


tunnels/structures)
 Question: I heard once Mr. de Lafayette talking about
Barage Europa. I missed the beginning of his speech.
What did he mean by Barage, and is this Barage related
to extraterrestrial structures on Europa near Jupiter?
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer

*** *** ***

41. On “Barage Europa” (Extraterrestrial


tunnels/structures)

Question: I heard once Mr. de Lafayette talking about Barage


Europa. I missed the beginning of his speech. What did he mean by
Barage, and is this Barage related to extraterrestrial structures on
Europa near Jupiter?

Answer:
Barage Europa is a term used by Russian cosmonaut to refer to
extraterrestrial tunnels and structures on other planets. Some
“spiritualists” locate these tunnels under water in the Atlantic Ocean.
Rubén Sobrino, a noted ufologist and a member of SEIP, reported
(as is, and unedited): “On January 16 of this year, almost all the
newspapers in our country echoed the same remarkable news item
from Moscow, carried by the prestigious EFE news agency. The
agency in question disclosed certain controversial statements made
by Russian astrophysicist Boris Rodionov to Moscow's
Komsomolskaya Pravda, in which he claimed to have proof of the
existence of "a highly developed extraterrestrial civilization on one of
the satellites of the planet Jupiter.

*** *** ***


42. On Bariya, and the Anunnaki’s creation of
Man

 Question #1: I can’t read the Sumerian texts to


understand what is going on. Primarily, I am interested
in finding anything that tells me something about how
the Anunnaki created us?
 Question #2: Where are those texts?
 Question #3: And something else, and without any
offense to you, please guide me to authors other than the
Ulema and your group who have found anything on this
 Question #4: And by the way, what did you mean by
Bariya? I read about it in one of your books, and could
not understand a thing.”
 Authors’ answers and comments by other scholars
 Bariya “Ba-riya’ah”
 I. Definition
 II. Bariya (The Creation) as described in the Sumerian
texts
 III. The creation of humans
 Here are additional Akkadian/Sumerian clay tablets
passages on the creation of the Man and pertinent
comments by scholars, historians, linguists and the
authors
 Ninlil, the legendary Sumerian “Queen Breeze”
 Marduk was the son of Ea
 In the Akkadian/Sumerian epic Enuma Elish, we read
 Inanna was the legendary Sumerian goddess who
created the first 7 prototypes of mankind
 The Sumerian-Anunnaki goddess Nammu “Namma”
and her son Enki created multiple forms of humans
 Ea killed Kingu, the demon son of Tiamat, and used his
blood to create mankind
 Apsu and the creation of man
 From the Sixth Tablet
 From the Seventh Tablet

_________________________
42. On Bariya, and the Anunnaki’s creation of Man

Note: Questions sent by H. Petraki, Athens, Greece.


Question #1: I can’t read the Sumerian texts to understand what is
going on. Primarily, I am interested in finding anything that tells me
something about how the Anunnaki created us?

Question #2: Where are those texts?

Question #3: And something else, and without any offense to you,
please guide me to authors other than the Ulema and your group
who have found anything on this.

Question #4: And by the way, what did you mean by Bariya? I read
about it in one of your books, and could not understand a thing.”

Authors’ answers and comments by other scholars:


Bariya “Ba-riya’ah”
Ana’kh. Noun.
I. Definition
II. Bariya (The Creation) as described in the Sumerian texts
III. The Creation of humans

________________

I. Definition:
Bariya is a term for the Creation in the Anunnaki’s language.

II. Bariya (The Creation) as described in the Sumerian


texts.
From Bariya, derived the primitive Arabic words Bari (Creator; God),
and Baria (Creation; creatures.)
The Sumerian Creation:
Only one account of the Sumerian Creation has survived, but it is a
suggestive one. This account functions as an introduction to the
story of “The Huluppu-Tree”:

III. The Creation of humans:

The Anunnaki god said:


“Blend the clay that you find in the abyss,
The good and royal fashioners (Goddesses-Creators of Man) will
thicken the clay
And you, Nammu, you will create the limbs (Of Man)
Birth-Goddess Ninmah will watch over you,
She will stand by you at your creation;
O my mother, proclaim that the new born
will be in the image of gods…”

*** *** ***

Here are additional Akkadian/Sumerian clay tablets


passages on the creation of the Man and pertinent
comments by scholars, historians, linguists and the
authors:

The Sumerian texts include various versions of the creation of


mankind by a multitude of Anunnaki’s gods and goddesses. Some
passages in the Sumerian texts refer to different creators, as well as
to multiple genetic experiments.
There is no reference to one singular genetic creation of the early
human races, or a solid certainty to the fact that mankind was
genetically created by one single god. In fact, a multitude of gods and
goddesses created different types and categories of human beings, to
name a few:
1-Ninlil, the legendary Sumerian “Queen Breeze”, was also
called Aruru, Ninhursag, Ninhursanga, the Lady of The Mountains,
the ruler of the heavens, underworld, wind, earth, and grain, wife of
Enlil and the mother of Nanna (Utu) experimented with different
forms and shapes of early human beings.
Ninlil also created Endiku.

2-Marduk was the son of Ea and husband of Sarpanitu, the sun-


god, and also the god of war, fire, earth and heaven, and one of the
major creators of heroes, gods and humans. He waged a ravaging
war against Tiamat, dismembered her, and used several parts of her
body to create the world and the early races of humanity.

3-Inanna was the legendary Sumerian goddess who created


the first 7 prototypes of mankind.
Many other civilizations worshipped her under different names, such
as Astarte, Istar, Ashtar, Asherat.
Inanna was called Ashtaroot and Ishtar in Phoenician; Ashtoreth and
Ashtaroth in Hebrew; Ashteroth in Canaanite; Atargatis in Greek.

4-The Sumerian-Anunnaki goddess Nammu “Namma” and


her son Enki created multiple forms of humans, sometimes
using clay, and some other times blood of warriors they slaughtered.

5-Ea killed Kingu, the demon son of Tiamat, and used his
blood to create mankind. Ea was the son of Anu. Sometimes he is
mentioned as the son of Anshar.

6-Apsu and the creation of man:


Sumerian/Akkadian/Mesopotamian. Noun. A primeval

From the clay of Apsu man was fashioned.


According to the Akkadian/Sumerian clay tablets found in Iraq, Apsu
advised mankind when the gods of heavens and Earth decided on
harming the human race. Apsu granted Adapa wisdom,
understanding and knowledge, and sent him to teach mankind.

*** *** ***

43. On Mu, Anunnaki’s interference in Earth’s


affairs, the reptilians, departure and return of
the Anunnaki, God, religions, and life after
death

 Question #1: MU's connection with the Anunnaki.


What can you tell me about the lost continent of MU?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #2: Where are the Anunnaki right now and
why don't they interfere on our planet anymore?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #3: We see, nearly every ancient civilization
somehow had some sort of contact with the Anunnaki.
So what did happen after that? Where did Anunnaki go
and why?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #4: Is it true that lots of Earth governments
including US are controlled or ruled by an Alien race
called reptilians?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #5: So, if modern religions are false, is there
a God Almighty?
 Note
 Question #6: What does happen to us when we die?
 Author’s note
 Question #7: Were the prophets controlled by
Anunnaki or they have manipulated the people as they
wished?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #8: Do you know anything about old Turks
named Gokturks?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #9: Do you have any knowledge about Turks
and their connection with Anunnaki or Sirius system?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #10: In the Lost book of Enki, Zecharia
Sitchin wrote, the mysterious face on Mars (which is still
unaccepted by NASA) was Anunnaki Alalu's graveyard.
Do you know is it true?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Question #11: Are Enlil, Enki, Anu etc. still alive?
 Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema
 Note
 Question #12: Can you write some info about you?
Where and when did you born, how did you go and learn
the ways of the Ulema, etc.?
 Answer of the authors

*** *** ***

43. On Mu, Anunnaki’s interference in Earth’s


affairs, the reptilians, departure and return of the
Anunnaki, God, religions, and life after death
Questions asked by Ismail Kemal Ciftcioglu, Turkey. (Unedited, and as
received):

Question #1: This is the most important question for me. In any of
the books I read, I haven’t come to an information about lost
continent of MU's connection with the Anunnaki. I assume you know
lots of things about it.
According to James Churchward's books, MU was even older than
Atlantis and home of the human civilization. Humans migrated from
MU to all over the world. But we know that Anunnaki were in
Mesopotamia. So what about it? What can you tell me about the lost
continent of MU?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


According to the legend and esoteric myths, Mu was a large
continent of an advanced civilization. It sunk in the ocean many
thousands of years ago. The story or Myth of Mu appeared for the
first time in the 19th century, thanks to the writings of Augustus Le
Plongeon (1825-1908), who claimed that the survivors of Mu went to
the Americas and established the Mayan Empire.
Then, in the first half of the 20th century, the prolific writer and
visionary extraordinaire James Churchward popularized the story of
Mu in a series of books he wrote: “The Children of Mu” published in
1931; “The Lost Continent of Mu” published in 1933, and “The Sacred
Symbols of Mu”, published in 1935. And in the 1930’s, Kamal
Atatürk (Baba Kamal) then leader of Turkey, your majestic country,
generously funded an academic and scientific research on Mu.

The great Turkish leader thought, that maybe, he will be able to


establish a direct link or some sort of connection betweek Turkey and
the word’s first civilizations that could include the Aztec, and the
Maya. Unfortunately, all attempts to prove the existence of MU
failed.
However, Ulema Sharif Al Takki Al Zubyani (1797-1877) stated that
Mu did exist some 50,000 years ago. He added that the original
name of Mu was Mari, and it was inhabited by people who were very
advanced in “Ilm Al Falak”, meaning space science. An enormous
explosion happened on the continent, caused by the reflections of
lights and rays emitted by gigantic “Miraya”, which means mirrors.

Coincidentally or strangely enough, the Anunnaki and Ulemite


literature referred to Miraya as a galactic tool used to receive and
emit cosmic messages, a sort of beam (Possibly atomic or laser), as
well as to record and decode events from the past, the present and
the future. Al Zubyani added: “Those mirrors were also used as
weapons, and if they are not handled properly, they could destroy a
whole country.”
Those who know Arabic, including the archaic dialect of the Arab
Peninsula, and Ana’kh will find out that there is a very close relation
(Perhaps linguistically only) between the Name Mari and the Arabic,
pre-Islamic word Mir’aat (Mir’-aat and Miraya) which means in both
languages (Ana’kh and Arabic) mirror.
Strangely enough, the French word “Miroir” and the English word
mirror derive directly from the Ana’kh (Anunnaki language) Miraya.
So here we have a million year old Anunnaki word “Miraya”, a
50,000 year old name “Mari”, a 7,000 year old Ulemite word “Mirra-
ya”, and a 5,000 year old Arabic word Miraya! Any connection?

*** *** ***

Question #2: Where are the Anunnaki right now and why don't
they interfere on our planet anymore?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


 1. The Anunnaki are on their magnificent planet Ne.be.ru
(Nibiru; Ashatari).
 They no longer interfere in humans’ affairs for many reasons,
to name a few:
 a. They are not interested in the human race, as they used to
do thousands of years go, however, there are new serious
concerns that made them monitor Earth and the human beings
at distance.
 b. Earth is no longer one of their kingdoms (Or colonies);
 c. Earth does not meet their needs, supply them with what
they need, or provide them with any significant resource(s);
 d. The Anunnaki do not need humans for any reason;
 e. The Anunnaki do no longer need the human beings as a
labor force.
 f. The Anunnaki have finished their job on Earth.
 e. Grosso modo, neither Earth, nor the human beings are
essential, meaningful or important to them, because you the
human race and your planet Earth can offer nothing to the
Anunnaki, at any level, whether it is culturally, scientifically,
technologically, genetically, philosophically or galactically.

However, you have to keep in mind, that the Anunnaki are now very
concerned about humans’ DNA contamination, and the operations of
the Grays on Earth.
These basically are the two principal reasons, why the Anunnaki are
going to interfere in humans’ affairs and Earth’s condition, not now,
but in the very near future. 2022 is the year and the time of the
return of the Anunnaki to Earth. And you are going to have plenty of
interferences from them.

*** *** ***


Question #3: We see, nearly every ancient civilization somehow
had some sort of contact with the Anunnaki.
So what did happen after that?
Where did Anunnaki go and why?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


 Already answered in our answer to your question #2.

*** *** ***

Question #4: Is it true that lots of Earth governments including US


are controlled or ruled by an Alien race called reptilians?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


 Nonsense!

*** *** ***

Question #5: So, if modern religions are false, is there a God


Almighty?
Note: This question has been already answered in this book, please
refer to the Table of Contents.

*** *** ***

Question #6: What does happen to us when we die?


Author’s note: This question has been already answered in this book,
please refer to the Table of Contents.

*** *** ***


Question #7: Were the prophets controlled by Anunnaki or they
have manipulated the people as they wished?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


 1. The Anunnaki never controlled any prophet.
 2. They have no reason to.
 3. Prophets and organized religions do control people; this is
exactly how they operate, and how they managed to stay in
business, and became extremely influential.

*** *** ***

Question #8: Do you know anything about old Turks named


Gokturks?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


It is very important to learn and to remember that pre-historic
Turkey as one of the strongholds and colonies of the Anunnaki. The
early Hittites who lived in Turkey, and who have estalished one of
the most formidable kingdoms on Earth had a close relation with the
second expedition of the Anunnaki to planet Earth.
The very ancient Turkish word Göktürk mean “Heavenly Turks”.
Surrounding countries, and particularyly the Chinese in years to
come called them “The Blue Princes”, “The Blue Turks”, and the
“Celestial Blue People”. It was told by Ulema Seif El Dinn Shawkat,
that the Göktürk have inherited Ana’kh manuscripts given to them
by the Arwadians.
The early Arwadians are acknowledged by the Anunnaki-Ulema to be
the direct descendants of the Anunnaki. Here once again, we find a
link between the ancient inhabitants of Turkey and the remnants of
the Anunnaki.

*** *** ***


Question #9: Do you have any knowledge about Turks and their
connection with Anunnaki or Sirius system?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


A large segment of the population of your ancestors, the Hittites and
their early leaders were Anunnaki’s offspring and remnants in
Anatolia (Asia Minor).

*** *** ***

Question #10: In the Lost book of Enki, Zecharia Sitchin wrote,


the mysterious face on Mars (which is still unaccepted by NASA) was
Anunnaki Alalu's graveyard. Do you know is it true?

Answer of the Anunnaki-Ulema:


 There are no frontiers to the imagination of Man!

*** *** ***

Question #11: Are Enlil, Enki, Anu etc. still alive?


Answer of the author:
Author’s note: This question has been already answered in this book,
please refer to the Table of Contents.

*** *** ***

Question #12: Can you write some info about you? Where and
when did you born, how did you go and learn the ways of the Ulema ,
etc.?
Answer of the author:
 Read the book “On the Road to Ultimate Knowledge” co-
authored by Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette and Dr. Ilil Arbel.

*** *** ***

44. On teleportation (Barka-kirama)

 Question #1: What is the technique called Barka-


kirama, Anunnaki-Ulema use for teleportation?
 Question #2: Please define Barka-kirama
 Note:
 I. Definition
 II. In ancient Middle Eastern literature
 III. The concept
 IV. The Tay Al Ard, self-teleportation and concept of
the Alkiramat “Keramat”

*** *** ***

44. On teleportation (Barka-kirama)


Questions:

Question #1: What is the technique called Barka-kirama,


Anunnaki-Ulema use for teleportation?

Question #2: Please define Barka-kirama.

Authors’ note: The following essay should answer your questions. It


is taken from de Lafayette original work “Book of Ramadosh”.

Barka-kirama:
Ana’kh. An Anunnaki extraterrestrial expression.
I. Definition
II. In ancient Middle Eastern literature
III. The concept
IV. The Taj Baba’s theory
V. Tay Al Ard, self-teleportation and Alkiramat “Keramat”
___________________

I. Definition:
A blessing or an enlightenment (Tanwir) technique that develops
teleportation.

It is composed of two words:


 a-Barka, which means blessing.
 b-Kirama, which means good deeds.

II. In ancient Middle Eastern literature:


Barka-kirama is a very important and a primordial Anunnaki’s
expression, because it is closely and directly related to Tay Al Ard,
and Tay Al Makan, which mean teleportation. Tay Al Ard is an
Ulemite/Arabic word. It is a metaphysical experience that produces a
teleportation phenomenon; a secret esoteric practice of the Ulema
and Allamah.
From Barka, derived:
 a-The Hebrew words Barak and Baraka (Blessings).
 b-The Arabic Baraka and Brakaat (Blessings).

From Kirama, derived:


 a-The Persian Keramat (Good deeds).
 b-The Arabic Kiramat (Honorable deeds).

III. The concept:


At one time, Barka-kirama, Tay Al Ard, and Tay Al Makan, were an
arcane mixture of elements and esoteric substances used by
Quelthulian ritualists in their teleportation experiences and
experiments.
The Ulema claim that they have learned its secret and how its works
from the Rou-hi-yin who are supreme beings from the Fifth
dimension.
When Islam became a major religion in the Near East, and the
Middle East, Tay Al Ard was banned by Prophet Muhammad, who
called its practitioners “Min Ahl Al Nar”, meaning verbatim: Those
who are from fire.
Fire meant hell, or the kingdom of Al Shaytan (Satan, the devil). The
Arabic pre-Islamic word Ulema was replaced by the Arabic Islamic
word Allamah or Al Hallama. However, the Ulema and the Allamah
were very different from each other in many ways.
The Ulema remained the custodians of the Anunnaki’s secret
knowledge and esoteric powers, while the Allamah were considered
as the “Alamin”, the learned ones and leading figures of letters,
literature, science and religion.

Nevertheless, many Muslim teachers and spiritualists remain Ulema


at heart. Many of them - secretly of course - joined the circle of the
non-Muslim Ulema to learn the ultimate knowledge acquired from
non-terrestrial beings..The Suphists were the first to join the Non-
Muslim Ulema.
Worth mentioning, that around, 850 A.D., Ulema and Allamah were
semantically overlapping each other. And both words came to mean
or express the same thing in the eye of Arab scholars, and in the
Islamic world. Many Soufiyyin (Sufis) by joining the Ulema, learned
some of the secrets of TayAl-Ard. They called it: “Tay Al Makan”,
meaning the folding of space.

It is composed of two Arabic words:


 a-Tay, which means folding or to fold.
 b-Al Makan, which means the Space; the location; the place.)

The Sufis replaced the word Al Makan with the word Al Ard.
The general meaning of Tay Al Ard or Tay Al Makan is to traverse the
earth without moving. Al Munawarin claim that instead of physically
moving from one place to another, an enlightened person can bring
to himself, to where he is standing, the place he wanted to reach.

In other words, the earth of the place to reach has been displaced
under the enlightened one’s feet. Ironically, this pre-Islamic concept
is now fully accepted by Muslim clerks, Cheiks and teachers of the
Islamic Shari’a and Fuk’h, grouped together under the umbrella of Al
Allamah.
Ulema or Allamah Qadhi, previously one of the leading figures of
Allameh Tabatabaei explained Tay Al Ard as the termination of
matter itself in the original location, and its re-appearance,
manifestation, and re-creation in its final location, the place one
wished to reach.
The Iranian Dehkhoda dictionary defined Tay Al Ard as: “An aspect
of Keramat “Kiramat” (Extraordinary deeds of saints and holy
people) in which instead of going toward a destination by taking a
step forward, the earth turns itself toward the traverser rapidly, in a
blink of an eye, regardless of how far the destination is." Ulema Ibn
Al Nadim bin Ishaq al-Nadim (a.k.a. Al Warrak died on September
17, 995. He wrote the Kitab al-Fihrist.) explained this phenomenon
by citing verses from the Quran, taken from Chapter Al Naml;
Verse: 27:38: Solomon said to his men: “O Chiefs, which of you can
bring me the throne of Queen of Sheba before she and her envoys
come to me in submission?”
Verse 27: 39: "Said an 'Ifrit of Al Jinns: “I will bring it to thee before
thou rise from thy council. In fact, I have full power for this purpose,
and may be trusted.”
Verse 27:40: “Said one who had knowledge of the Book: “I will bring
it to thee within a blink of any eye!” Then when the sage Solomon
saw it placed right before him, he said: “This was done by the
authority of God all mighty, my Lord.”

Some Middle Eastern sages and teachers of religious esoteric dogmas


suggested that according to these verses, the Ulema Asif ibn Al
Birkhia teleported the throne of Queen of Sheba almost
instantaneously, in a blink of an eye.
This was confirmed in a Hadith (Dialogue, a chat, or a discourse) by
Jaafar Al Sadiq.

Allamah have explained this teleportation phenomenon very


differently. They claimed that the teleportation occurred because
Ulema Asif ibn Birkhia used one of the secret “Asma Al Allah Al
Sab’a Al Husma.” (One of the seven secret names of God.)
The knowledge and use of one of the secret holy and lovely names of
God allowed Ulema Asif ibn Birkhia to teleport the throne.

The Ulema, students of the Anunnaki, briefly explained this


phenomenon. Ulema Cheik Al Kabir said (Verbatim): “Time is
represented with 2 lines not perfectly aligned; one for you, the other
for what is not you.
Space is represented with two circles; one for you, the other for what
is not you. If you manage to place yourself between one of the two
lines and one of the two circles without touching the other line and
the other circle, you will conquer time-space.” The Taj Baba explains
Tay Al Ard as the elapse of time and distances in the vicinity, and to
reach far distant places in a flick of an eye.
It also means the transport for others to get there, and to call far
distant things to become close at hands through the Karamat. It is a
tradition and ritual practice related to Aulia Allah (Friends and
favourites of God) that allow them to reach any place in the world
instantly. The distance-time and places are wrapped up in a flick of
second, and cross all that at once.

IV. The Tay Al Ard, self-teleportation and concept of the


Alkiramat “Keramat”:
Alkiramat “Keramat” is a Farsi (Iranian) and Arabic term meaning
holy deeds that allow teleportation. Literally (Folding up of the
earth) is the name for thaumaturgical teleportation in the mystical
aspect of Islamic religious, esoteric, metaphysical and philosophical
traditions.

In 2004, in a report to the United States Air Force (Dubbed: AFRL-PR-


ED-TR-2003-0034), Dr. Eric W. Davis recommended the study of
teleportation, which he defined as “The conveyance of persons or
inanimate objects by psychic means.”
Being an allegedly esoteric knowledge by nature, it is not known
exactly how it takes place, but theories and explanations abound. The
most prevalent theory has to do with the concept of consciousness
and will. The person wishes to be some place, and he is then simply
there an instant later.
This view can perhaps be understood from the perspective of
Western philosophical idealism, where esse est percipi: If space does
not have an objective reality, and reality itself is thought of as
observer-based and a subjective entity, then ideas such as moving in
space without actually physically moving are no longer unchartered
possibilities.

In addition, the jinn are believed to possess this knowledge of


transportation, however in a limited amount, according to the
Allamah. Famous Sheikhs, Imams, and prominent figures such as
Abusaeid Abolkheir or Rumi or Ak-Khidr, were believed to possess
kiramat, and writings from medieval Islam are full of stories and
reports of certain individuals possessing such a trait. For example,
Idries Shah and Robert Graves mention the case where senior
members of the Azimia order were reputed to appear, like many of
the ancient Sheikhs at different places at one and the same time.
Many other examples can be found in Attar's Tadhkirat Al-Awliya
(Biographies of the Saints) or the works of Ibn Arabi, as well as other
similar chronicles.
However, no one for sure has known the number and identity of all
those who possess such knowledge, since according to Hujviri, those
who hold such knowledge “do not know one another, and are not
aware of the other's state of excellence, and are hidden from
themselves and from mankind.”
One of the most discussed phenomena of this supposedly esoteric
knowledge is the event of traveling without actually moving. Islamic
texts and records from the mystics are full of such accounts from
various eras.
For example, Bayazid Bastami has many such accounts, colored with
mystical flavors, surrounding his life.

In one account, he was asked, “They say you walk on water?”


“A piece of wood can do that too,” he replied.
“They say you travel to Mecca at night and return by dawn?” he was
asked.
“But a bird at flight can do that too” was his answer.
“So what is the meaning of being human?” he was asked.
“A human is he who does not fasten his heart to anything but God,”
he replied.

*** *** ***

45. On the various aliens capabilities of


learning many languages and ways of using
their methods to learn these languages
 Question # 1: How do all the various aliens know so
many of our languages?
 Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette’s answer
 Question # 2: Is there a way for us to learn using their
methods?
 Authors’ answer
 Question# 3: It would make the world a much better
place if everyone could understand each other
 Answer

*** *** ***

45. On the various aliens capabilities of learning


many languages and ways of using their methods
to learn these languages

Note: Questions from Katy Fish, New York, and Wisconsin, USA.
Question# 1: How do all the various aliens know so many of our
languages?

Answer:
The Ana’kh was the Anunnaki’s language on Earth for thousands of
years. The early Mesopotamians, Phoenicians, inhabitants of Arwad,
Ugarit, Amrit, Atlanteans, Hittites (Ancestors of the Turks), the early
Hyskos (Ancestors of the Armenians), spoke Ana’kh.
In ancient and modern languages, in Eastern as well as in Western
languages, you would find more than 7,000 Anunnaki’s (Ana’kh)
words, sometimes, Anunnaki’s expressions and paraboles.
Thus, all our languages originated from the Anunnaki’s language.
This, should explain in part, why the “Aliens, as you called them” are
familiar with “so many of our languages.”

The Anunnaki’s language (Ana’kh) had a major linguistic and


epistemological influence on the languages of the ancient world, as
well as upon the civilization, culture and religions of the ancient Near
and Middle East, including but not limited to the Phoenicians,
Sumerians, Assyrians, Akkadians, Babylonians, Mesopotamians,
Copts, Hittites, Egyptians, Arabs, and Hebrews.
Many of the Ana’kh words entered the early languages of those
civilizations, and from the original Ana’kh, derived thousands of
ancient Semitic and non-Semitic words and expressions, some very
noticeable in Akkadian-Sumerian epics such as the Epic of
Gilgamesh, and Enuma Elish, as well as in the Epic of the Phoenician
Cosmogony.

For instance:
 1-The Ana’kh word Ab, meaning father became Ab in Arabic,
Abu and Abuya in Aramaic, Abba in Hittite, so on.
 2-The Ana’kh word Agirim, means first baked clay.

Composed of two words:


 a-A, which means first,
 b-Girim, which means clay.
From Agirim, derived the Sumerian, Babylonian, and Akkadian word
Girim (Clay).

*** *** ***

 3-The Ana’kh word A-kel means food.


From A-kel, derived the Sumerian Akalum, and the Arabic Akel,
which mean food.

*** *** ***


 4-The Ana’kh word Amamu, means a front.
From Amamu, derived the Arabic word Amam, which means ahead;
in front, and the Akkadian/Sumerian word Elamu, which means
front.

*** *** ***

 5-The Ana’kh word Amram, means good subjects of the


Anunnaki’s leaders; good union; highly developed
communities.
Composed of two words:
 a-Am (Good; kind.)
 b-Ram (People; community; population; tribe.)

In Biblical studies, Amram means high people; kindred of the High;


friend of Jehovah.
In primitive Arabic, Ram meant: People; group. Henceforth, the
name of the Palestinian city Ramallah could be interpreted as the
people of God, since Allah means to the Arabs and Muslims, what
exactly the word Jehovah means to the Jews: God.
When Enki or Ea called upon Avraham, he told him: I am your god,
and I am now changing your name from Av-raham to Ab-Raham,
because you are going to lead my people as the father of my people
on earth. Av became Ab. And Ab in all the 14 different ancient
languages of the Near East and the Middle East means father.
From the Ana’kh Ab, derived the words: Ab, Abu, Abi, Aba, Abba,
Abuya, Abouna; all meaning the very same thing: Father. And from
the Ana’kh word ram, derived the ancient Hebrew, Aramaic and
Arabic word Ram: People.

Centuries later, Ram acquired a multitude of meanings.


For instance:
 a-In ancient Hebrew, Ram is pleasing.
 b-In Sanskrit mythology, Ram means supreme.
 c-In the pre-Islamic Arabic era, called Al-Gahiliya “Jahiliya”
(Years of darkness), Ram meant a group of people. Synonym:
Ra’bh.

From the Ana’kh Ram, we have today, the Arabic Ramy and the
Spanish Ramos. In ancient times, the early Armenians called
themselves the people of Ram. “They recognized themselves as the
People of the Ram and their supreme deity was Khal-di. Thus was
derived the land of the original Khaldini, later corrupted by Greeks in
the times of Achaemenian to Chaldea, as mentioned in The Ark of
Noah, David Fasold.

*** *** ***

 6-The Ana’kh word Aneshtu: Knowledge; alert mind.


From Aneshtu, derived the Chaldean, Akkadian and Sumerian verb
Neshtug (To understand).

*** *** ***

 7- The Ana’kh word Anganzir: First Night; first darkness.


Composed from two words:
 a-An, which means first; the one.
 b-Ganzir, which means darkness.

From Aganzir, derived the Sumerian words Agenzer (Darkness) and


Ganzir (The world of the dead.)

*** *** ***


 9-The Ana’kh word Annas-shim, means group of
passengers; group of people. From Annas, derived the
Phoenician word Anat, which means people, and the proto-
Arabic word Annas or An-naas, which means people; humans;
groups gathering. It is still in use in contemporary Arabic.
*** *** ***

 1o-The Ana’kh word Aruru, means creative force; the creator


of life. From Aruru derived the Arabic word Rouh, and the
Aramaic-Hebrew words Rouach, Rouah, Rohka, meaning soul.

*** *** ***

 11-The Ana’kh word Asangari or Askari means soldier;


warrior. From Asangari, derived the Turkish and Arabic word
Askari, which means a soldier. The Ana’kh word Askari
appeared in several Semitic and Middle Eastern languages,
including Turkish, Swahili, Nabatean, Arabic, Persian, and
Somali.

*** *** ***

 12- The Ana’kh word Ashirach: A prisoner. From Ashirach,


derived the Hebrew and Arabic words Asir.

*** *** ***

 13- From the Ana’kh word Arda, derived the Hebrew word
Eretz, and the Arabic word Ard which mean earth, or soil.

*** *** ***

 14- The Ana’kh expression Baliba nahr usu na Ram.


Translated verbatim: “The water of the river purified my people.”
Attributed to Sinhar Marduchk in the Book of Rama-Dosh. Baliba
means flows of waters. Nahr means river (Same meaning in Hebrew,
Phoenician and Arabic).
Usu means to clean or purify.
Na means my or our.
Ram means people (Same meaning in Phoenician, primitive Arabic,
early Armenian and ancient Hebrew).
The Ana’kh word “Usu” also means to dig.
We find similar meaning in the Annals of Sardanapalus: “Nahrtu istu
nahr zaba anta ahri nahr babilat kanin sumsa abbi.” Translated
verbatim: “A river from the upper Zab I dug and its name I called.”

*** *** ***

 15-The Ana’kh word Banati: Daughters; girls.


From Banati, derived the Assyrian word Banati (Women), the Arabic
and Hebrew words Bint and Banat (Girls).

Note: I could cite up to 7,000 Anunnaki’s words that created 23,000


equivalent words used today in the Western and Eastern languages,
but the book space limitation would not allow me to do so.
Please refer to my books: “Anunnaki Dictionary Thesaurus. Ana’kh:
Language of the Extraterrestrial Gods and Goddesses”, and
“Anunnaki Language and Vocabulary.”

*** *** ***

On aliens’ abilities of speaking many of our languages:


As to the languages of other extraterrestrial races, and aliens’
abilities of speaking many of our languages, Ulema Oppenheimer has
said that aliens can record on their Miraya and grids, all the dialects
and languages on Earth in a few seconds, code the accents and words
pronunciations (Dictions), rewind everything they have recorded,
and speak to you in your language. And if they miss a word, they can
transmit it to your brain telepathically and you wouldn’t know the
difference.

*** *** ***


Question #2: Is there a way for us to learn using their methods?

Asnwer:
 1. Absolutely. There are two Anunnaki-Ulema techniques that
allow you to learn many languages in no time.
 3. The first one is called Jisru, which means bridge in
Akkadian, Sumerian, Assyrian, Old Babylonian, Arabic,
Ulemite and Ana’kh.
 2. There is a bridge between all Eastern languages.
 3. There is a bridge between all Western languages.
 4. When you cross the bridge, all affiliated languages will be
instantly absorbed by your mind.
 5. The second technique is called “Ilmu or Dirasa Fik-riya”,
which means the mental study. More precisely, the activation of
your mind.
 6. Both techniques will easily allow you to learn up to 24
languages in less than 2 weeks.

*** *** ***

Question #3: It would make the world a much better place if


everyone could understand each other.

Answer:
 1. That is correct.
 2. But understanding each other is never enough. We should
love each other unconditionally.
 3. And there are two rapid ways to do it:
 a- To start to feel the pleasure in the pleasure of giving;
 b- To forgive as much as you can, and help everybody without
restriction, especially those who cannot return the favor.
*** *** ***

46. On super tall beings, Coral Castle, Admiral


Byrd, animal mutilations

 Question #1: What is known about The Big Boys...the


super, super tall beings that are like no other entities?
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer
 Question #2: Who were the beings who lived in the
caves in the American southwest which were discovered
approx. 100 years ago by the Smithsonian explorer?
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer
 Question #3: Does LaFayette have any theories as to
how 'coral castle' was built?
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer
 Question #4: Does LaFayette have any theories as to
the meaning of the crop circles?
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer
 Question #5: What is really going on on the moon?
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer
 Question #6: Is there anything to the theories
regarding what Admiral Byrd saw from the plane at the
South Pole and the reports from places like Mt Shasta?
 Ulema de Lafayette’s answer
 Question #7: Who or what is really doing the animal
'mutilations' and for what reason?
 Answer

____________________
46. On super tall beings, Coral Castle, Admiral
Byrd, animal mutilations
Note: Questions from Ms. L., who did not want to reveal her identity, and who
asked me not to mention her name in the book.
Questions:
Question #1: What is known about The Big Boys...the super, super
tall beings that are like no other entities?

Answer:
 1. In ancient times, they were called the giants (Biblical
Giants), as well as Gibborim, Jababira in Hebrew, Aramaic,
Syriac, Assyrian, and Arabic, and Bene ha Elohim by the
Habiru (Early Hebrews) and the Jews of Babylon. Alternate
names: Anakim, Raphaim, Nephilim, Anunnaki, Anuki, so on.
 2. In modern day ufology, theories about them are endless,
and are not worthy of any discussion. 99.99% of what you read
about Anunnaki (Articles, reports, blogs, and personal opinions
and vicious attacks on the Anunnaki) are silly and FALSE, even
if they were written by famous authors, college professors and
so-called authorities in the field.
 3. There is no such thing as “An authority on the Anunnaki”,
unless the author of those articles, claims and opinions:

1-Knows very well the Akkadian language;

2-Has demonstrated linguistic expertise in Akkadian, Old


Babylonian, Sumerian, and Assyrian languages. This expertise is
accepted if the author has taught these languages in accredited
institutions, and/or has either deciphered the cuneiform clay tablets,
translated them, published his or her translations with reference to
the original texts and their transliteration, or simply wrote
dictionaries and lexicons on these languages.
How many people do you who have accomplished that?
I do know some, and I have read outstanding work done by
illustrious researchers, authors and linguists. But this literary elite
vintage has faded away, longtime ago!!

3-Has spent meaningful and extended time (Not less than 5


years) in the Middle East and the Near East, researching,
and/or participating in any of the following activities and projects
belonging to: archeology, anthropology, regional history, linguistic
studies of the modern, ancient and vanished languages of the
regions.

4-Has visited museums and institutions of learning


displaying the ancient clay tablets, and conferred with curators
known for their expertise in the field.

5-Has been trained, oriented and accredited by the


Anunnaki-Ulema. Allow me to point out that there are 700 Ulema
worldwide, and 200 Anunnaki-Ulema Mounawariin.
Have those authors previously mentioned, and those Internet mental
cases bloggers, nerds and wacki-wackos been trained by or accepted
by the Anunnaki-Ulema, or published any book or dictionary on the
languages of the Mesopotamian clay tablets, history religions,
culture, folklore, mythology and civilizations of the ancient kingdoms
in the Middle East and Near East?
Have they??????
Show me one who is still around!

*** *** ***

Question #2: Who were the beings who lived in the caves in the
American southwest which were discovered apx 100 years ago by the
Smithsonian explorer?

Answer:
 1. They are not extraterrestrials.
 2. They simply belong to different human races.

*** *** ***

Question #3: Does LaFayette have any theories as to how 'coral


castle' was built?

Answer:
 1. I am fully convinced that the very loving and the very
peaceful, the late Mr. Edward Leedskalnin has built his most
unusual castle using levitation.
 2. One week before he was attacked and murdered by a gang
of loosers and drifters, he told Master Sorenztein how he
managed to transport his initial castle to where it is located
now, and demonstrated to him how the huge stones were lifted.
 3. It was said that Mr. Edward Leedskalnin has acquired these
supernatural powers from learning the Tay Al Ard techniques
from the honorable Master Naphtali ben Yacoob, a colleague of
the honorable Anunnaki-Ulema Rabbi Mordecai ben Zvi in
Latvia. Master Mordecai was born in Latvia.

*** *** ***

Question #4: Does de LaFayette have any theories as to the


meaning of the crop circles?

Answer:
 1. The simple and ugly ones are man-made.
 2. The ones with quasi academic and popular patterns are
made by academicians, skeptics, and “challengers”. You know
what I mean.
 3. The ones with spherical and “propagated” designs, forms
and patters are made by elements of the nature, including
weather, some kind of vortexes, space, atmospheric conditions,
and additional anomalies.
 4. Those which could be equated and/or associated with
mathematical symbols and scientific languages are made by
intelligent forces, and higher elements that manifest their
presence occasionally for the purpose of guiding and
stimulating the human intelligence.

*** *** ***

Question #5: What is really going on on the moon?

Answer:
 1. Mind-boggling and unbelievable projects, activities and
secret operations, I am not allowed to talk about.
 2. I do not wish to jeopardize and/or threaten my safety,
security and sanity!

*** *** ***

Question #6: Is there anything to the theories regarding what


Admiral Byrd saw from the plane at the South Pole and the reports
from places like Mt Shasta?

Answer:
 1. Absolutely! More than you think.
 2. The book “De Lafayette Mega Encyclopedia of UFOs,
Extraterrestrials, Aliens Encounters & Galactic Races.”
contains hundreds of pages on this subject, with mind-bending
facts, findings, data and secret reports.” Please refer to it.

*** *** ***


Question #7: Who or what is really doing the animal 'mutilations'
and for what reason?

Answer:
 1. The Grays, and some para-military units.
 2. Again, I can’t talk anymore about this subject.
 3. I want to be always “welcome” in the United States!
 3. However, you can still read what I have written on animal
mutilations, before I came to the United States.

*** *** ***

47. Rekh-get-Amen, and the Anunnaki-Ulema


Extraordinary Deeds and Faculties

I. Definition and introduction


II. Unusual deeds by Anunnaki-Ulema as told by an Ulema
novice
1. Introduction: The Anunnaki-Ulema
a- Anunnaki-Ulema, Grand Master Li
b- Anunnaki-Ulema Cheik Al Huseini
c- Anunnaki-Ulema Rabbi Mordechai
II. Stories about the Anunnaki-Ulema
1. Master Li calming down a cobra in the street of Benares
2. Making a bird from paper
3. Master Li feeding the fish and birds with food that came
from nowhere
4. The Tuareg and the magical coffee cup
5. Folding the space
6. The amazing deeds of Anunnaki-Ulema Mordechai

______________________
47. Rekh-get-Amen, and the Anunnaki-Ulema
Extraordinary Deeds and Faculties
I. Definition and introduction:
Rekh-get-Amen, refers to a group of Anunnaki-Ulema known for
their extraordinary deeds and faculties.
In the West, writers interpreted Rekh-get-Amen, as the name of the
priests, hierophants, and teachers of magic, who, according to
Lenormant, Maspero, the Champollions, etc., etc., “could levitate,
walk the air, live under water, sustain great pressure, harmlessly
suffer mutilation, read the past, foretell the future, make themselves
invisible, calm down snakes, and cure diseases” (Bonwick, Religion
of Magic).
And the same author adds: “Admission to the mysteries did not
confer magical powers.

These depended upon two things:


 a-The possession of innate capacities;
 b-The knowledge of formulæ employed under suitable
circumstances.”

*** *** ***

II. Unusual deeds by Anunnaki-Ulema

______________________

1. Introduction: The Anunnaki-Ulema.


The Anunnaki-Ulema are not a homogenous group. They come from
various backgrounds, born to parents of diverse religions, and from
every country in the world.
None of that matters to them – their affiliation is never to a religion,
nor to a country. They are citizens of the world and they serve
humanity. The way they serve is not the same. Some Anunnaki-
Ulema are recluses, spending their lives in study and research.
Others live in the world and are very much part of it. For example,
the powerful organization, Pères du Triangle, which has enormous
influence on world affairs, economics, security, and politics, and is
functioning in total secrecy, is manned entirely by people who have
had the Anunnaki-Ulema training.

The members are hardly recluses. In the Lodges occupied by the


Pères du Triangle, one can meet heads of state, military leaders,
Nobel Prize winners, and many other dignitaries who are entirely in
the public eye.
All Anunnaki-Ulema share high ethics, unblemished moral behavior,
charity, love of animals that includes strict vegetarian diet, service to
the poor and helpless, and most interesting – they are all rewarded
by a legendary longevity.
Every one of the Masters that Germain Lumière had been taught by
was at least a hundred years old, and some were close to two
hundred. Nor do they show the signs of age; they are able to choose
the age they appear to be, and often change it, which may confuse
ordinary people with whom they mingle.

*** *** ***

a- Anunnaki-Ulema, Grand Master Li:


Master Li is Germain Lumière’s first teacher. He was born in China,
and when we meet him in the book, he is well over a hundred years
old, but looks about fifty. He is tall, slim, and has a white beard.
Sometimes he wears traditional Chinese robes, sometimes he prefers
a European attire – very likely depending on the type of his current
mission.
Master Li works in the diplomatic service, sometimes as an
ambassador, other times behind the scenes, aiding governments all
over the world in the most delicate affairs. His linguistic abilities are
legendary, and his turn of mind highly philosophical and extremely
calm under all circumstances.
He is also a talented healer and Germain is a witness to his treatment
of a very sick woman whom he brings back to complete health –
instantaneously.

Though he possesses considerable extrasensory abilities and


techniques, Master Li’s view of the matter is that if it is possible to do
something naturally, it is best to leave it at that and not call on any
supernatural agency or power. He does not consort or employ
supernatural beings unless absolutely necessary.

*** *** ***

b- Anunnaki-Ulema Cheik Al Huseini:


Living and working in Baalbeck, Lebanon, The Cheik has access to
some of the most esoteric and important documents in the world,
including The Book of Rama Dosh.
He belongs to a different tradition than Germain’s other masters. As
a Middle Eastern Ulema, he comfortably used all the magical
techniques that the Western Ulema are trying to avoid, since they
follow a different road, working like scientists and generally
preferring a simple life style.
He even employs non-human entities, such as Djinn and Afrit, on a
regular basis. Even though his own mode of living is modest, he does
occasionally follow the sumptuous tradition of King Solomon.

*** *** ***

c- Anunnaki-Ulema Rabbi Mordechai:


Rabbi Mordechai defies characterization.
He dresses like a rabbi, works as an alchemist, Kabbalist, and
linguist in addition to his usual Ulema duties, and while his turn of
mind is highly scientific, he is not above creating supernatural beings
if he needs them to do some heavy and quick work for his many
charity cases.
Mordechai can communicate with animals, create genetically
engineered plants without a laboratory, and teleport himself in plain
daylight. Larger than life and possessing eyes that are so brilliant
that they make people lower their own eyes when talking to him, he
is certainly not a recluse. On the contrary, he is a bon-vivant, a great
cook, loves to dance, and plays the balalaika like a professional.
He can also drink untold quantities of vodka without any ill effects,
and despite strict vegetarianism, believes that caviar is another
matter and altogether a gray area (“they are eggs!” he claims).
Always cheerful, there is no adversity that Rabbi Mordechai cannot
conquer.
Note: He was born in Russia, and it is well documented that he was
older than the last Czar.

II. Stories about the Anunnaki-Ulema

_______________________

The Ulema teachers could do extraordinary things with utmost


serenity and a nonchalant flair.

1. Honorable Master Li calming down a cobra in the street


of Benares:
Note from A. Doudnikova: As told by Germain Lumiere; herewith
some excerpts from stories told by Lumiere:

*** *** ***

Lumiere’s in his own words:


The streets were literally lined with people, laying on the
ground, wrapped in their sand-colored clothes, the same color as the
ground. I could not understand why people had to be so poor as to
sleep in the street.
You could not even tell if the people were dead or alive, and the
scene frightened me very much. But soon I realized that no one paid
particular attention to the situation.
Women wearing colorful silk saris, that were as striking as the
feathers of tropical birds, wove their way among the bodies on the
ground. Westerners, mostly British, did the same, looking very
military and imposing.
Suddenly I saw a horrible thing. A large snake crawled among
the people on the ground, slithering here and there. No one moved,
allowing the snake to pass. I froze with terror; I never saw a snake,
except in the zoo.
The Master put his hand on my shoulder. “The snake will not
hurt you, Germain,” he said. He raised his hand, and twisted it
around, making a strange sound. This was bizarre.
How could one hand make a sound? Apparently, the snake heard it.
It rose vertically to the air, went down again, turned, and left the
scene. Many of the poor children came to thank the Master. I
realized he was well known around this area.
“You see, Germain, the snake simply went about his own
business. It is not right to assume that he meant to harm anyone and
be afraid of him, he had no such intention,” the Master said
cheerfully. All his lessons were like that. He never said, “Watch, I am
going to do something wonderful now, pay attention.” No, he did not
want us to pay attention to himself, only to what we could see and
learn. And indeed his students, knowing that, never interrupted him
but always paid attention, since just being around him was a
constant learning experience – and a very pleasant one at that.”

*** *** ***

2. Making a bird from paper:


Another story told by Germain Lumiere.

“Eventually, after a few weeks, the Master (Mastor Li) came


back. We were very happy to see him, of course.
I was particularly interested in his return, not just because I liked
him, but because I saw a mystery or two at the house that I wanted to
question him about.

First, I discovered a room which had a closed door. I knew I


should not enter, but I did anyway, and to my surprise I saw a very
untidy mess of papers, all sizes and colors. I was not comfortable
asking anyone else, so when the Master came back, I confessed my
spying and asked him what the papers were for. The Master smiled,
and said, “Go choose whatever paper you like, any color, any size.
Bring two or three pieces.”
I picked a few nice pieces and returned. The Master asked,
“what would you like to see? A bird, maybe? Shall we have a bird visit
us?”
“But birds don’t go in houses,” I said. “Only if they are lost. I
don’t want any bird to be frightened and lost.”
“Not everything is as it seems,” said the Master. “Some birds
are not lost, nor are they afraid. They just visit.” He quickly made a
few folds in one of the papers, a white one, and to my amazement, a
neat sculpture of a pigeon was sitting in his hands. I laughed,
delighted with the trick.
“And I think a bird likes flowers, doesn’t it?” asked the
Master.
“Yes, they do,” I said with conviction.
The Master made a few folds in another piece of paper, a red
one. A rose magically appeared in his hand. I was thrilled, and
touched the paper carefully. It was all so lifelike. As I touched the
bird, it flew out of the Master’s hand. I recoiled, slightly shocked.
“Nothing to be afraid of,” said the Master. “Come along.” He
took me to the garden, and the bird flew after us in a rather business-
like manner, as if knowing exactly what it meant to do. In plain day
light, the Master gently put the rose on a rose bush. The paper rose
immediately turned into a real flower, and the paper bird, now a real,
living pigeon, settled on the bush and made distinctive pigeon
sounds.
“These two are not lost at all,” said the Master. “I think they
are very happy.” I had to agree. Somehow, the incident, despite its
magical and unusual tone, did not frighten me at all. I loved it.
And then came the miracle of the tree. In another room in this
large house, around the exit to the garden, and with its door wide
open, resided many empty flower pots, with just dirt in them but no
plants. Passing by them one day, I asked the master, “Why do you
keep all these empty pots?”
“They are made for giant trees that like to live inside the
house,” said the Master.
“But how can you fit a giant tree inside? They are bigger than
the ceiling,” I said skeptically.
“Well, I really was remiss in not having a few in the house
already,” said the Master. “They are very important and bring
happiness and luck. Please choose one pot, and let me show you how
the biggest tree in the world will fit into it.”
“But it can’t come into the house by itself,” I said.
“No, they don’t walk, but we can go out and look for it,” said the
Master. We went out and stood before a giant pepper tree, covered
by feathery leaves and red tiny dots of the pepper spice. A living,
thriving, beautiful tree that must have been in the garden for many
years.
“This tree?” I asked. “But it is not cut, it is growing! Don’t cut it,
it may be hurt!”
“Of course I won’t hurt the tree. But we needed to choose a
special kind of tree, right? That is why we are looking at it. Now come
back inside and see what happened,” said the Master. We returned
into the house, and in the formerly empty pot stood a tiny tree, the
exact replica of the giant tree outside, complete with the small red
dots of the pepper spice. I stared, speechless.
How did it go into the pot?
“This tree is older than the one outside,” said the Master. “As a
matter of fact, the giant tree is the baby of this little one, and grew
from one of its seeds. Where I am going to take you some day, when
we start our serious studies, we don’t measure people by their size.
We measure them by this,” he said, tapping the top of his nose to the
top of his forehead, “and by that,” tapping a small area around his
heart. “Size means nothing.”

Gradually, slowly, something was happening to me. I calmed


down. Under the peaceful influence of the teacher, the magical
occurrences, the friendships I developed, and the newness of the
culture, I began to feel more and more confident. Of course, I was
not aware of it, until an interesting incident brought it to my six-
year-old attention.”

*** *** ***

3. Master Li feeding the fish and birds with food that came
from nowhere:
Note from A. Doudnikova:
Here Germain Lumiere is telling us a heart-felt story about a most
unusual fishing experience he had in the company of his teacher
Master Li. Both are visiting a small Chinese village on the beach.

Lumiere said (In his own words):


“We will go about the island and show you how people live
here,” said the Master. We went down to the small beach. Some
boats were on the beach, turned upside down, and the men were
repairing them.
Unfortunately, the Master explained, they are so poor, and have
so little wood, that sometimes they had to simply patch a boat rather
than fix it properly, and endangered themselves when they went to
sea. But they had no choice in the matter.
Others were fixing their fishing equipment. I saw that when they
fished near the beach, they used nets, and when they fished farther in
the water, they used boxes made of rattan or bamboo. “Would you
like to try to fish?” said the Master.
“I have never fished before,” I said. “What would you use, a
net or a box?”
“Neither,” said the Master. We went to the edge of the sea. Soft little
waves touched the rocks that lined the beach like a natural pier.
“You can take your shoes off so they won’t get wet, but don’t
put your feet or play in the water for a little while,” said the Master.
“We don’t want to scare the fish.” He sat on a rock, rolled up his
sleeves, and put his finger in the water. He held nothing in his hands.
I watched, fascinated, as the fish started to come to his finger,
stuck their little heads up and opened their mouths. From
somewhere, I can’t imagine where, the Master produced quite a lot of
crumbs, and fed the fish.
That was the Master’s idea of fishing; he never killed an animal
in his life. When he was done, and the fish left, I grabbed his hand to
see if there was any mysterious object in it, something with which he
called the fish to his fingers. But there was nothing in his hands,
nothing in his sleeves.
The Master laughed. “No, I have nothing in my hands,
Germain. It is simply knowing how to use your hands properly. Do
you know how to join your hands?”
“Yes,” I said, and grasped my hands together.
“There is a better way,” said the Master. He leaned his closed
fist inside his other hand, which was open. “You see, Germain, the
fist, which you make with the right hand, is for strength and power.
The left hand, left open, is the shield. By holding the fist and the
shield together, you protect others from your own aggression.”
I tried it, and he approved of the way I placed the hands.
“Now,” he said, “I am going to teach you how to use the hands,
followed by your body, to do what we call ‘ballet with nature.’ I would
like you to practice it every day. Would you do that? And later, when
we meet again, I will show you the next step.”
“Sure,” I said. “How do you ballet with nature?”
“First, you move your left arm in circular motion. Let your
body flow with it, your whole body; sway and turn with it. When you
get tired, move the arm in the same way, only in the opposite
direction.”
I tried, and it felt very nice both ways.
“Now, take the right hand, make a fist, and repeat the same
dancing motion, first in this direction, then the other.” I tried, and
again, found it easy. Then I combined the two motions, under his
instructions, and he approved. I promised I would do it every day,
which I faithfully did. I honestly thought I was dancing… only later I
found out, when it was necessary and urgent, that the Master, the
gentle, loving Master, really taught me the first rules of deadly self
defense, and it would be rather handy later in life.
In the meantime, we returned to the temple. There were a
few birds on the shore, not many. To my surprise, they took a look at
the Master, and a couple of them flew straight at him and sat on his
shoulder. The Master produced more crumbs from thin air, and the
birds had their lunch. How did they know he could feed them, I
wondered. “They just know,” said the Master. “You will find that
animals understand more than people do, if you love them.”
I have learned so much and enjoyed my stay in the island, but
unfortunately we could not stay as long as we wished.

*** *** ***

4. The Tuareg and the magical coffee cup:


Note from A. Doudnikova:
Germain Lumiere and his teacher are now in Damascus (Capital of
Syria) visiting an old friend of Master Li.
Here is Germain Lumiere’s story in his own words:

Two years after we arrived in Damascus, I was playing in the


garden. One of the servants came out and told me, “We have some
Chinese people in the house. They want to see you.” I had no idea
who they could be, and went into the house, rather surprised.
As soon as I crossed the threshold, I froze, noticing a faint,
delicate scent of amber mixed with flowers in the air. Only one
person on earth was associated with this unique scent combination.
I instantly knew the Master came for me. I ran to him and we
hugged each other, I was so happy to see him, I missed him so much.
Suddenly I realized that he looked different – he was dressed in
a European suit, not his usual Chinese robes. “And won’t you say
hello to my wife?” he said, laughing. I looked at the woman who
stood nearby, smiling, and did not recognize her.
Who was this lady, dressed like an elegant European, wearing
makeup and perfume? She laughed at my amazement and I suddenly
recognized my old friend and was delighted to see her. The first
thought that crossed my mind was “Thank Heaven we fixed the
toilets…”
They loved the house, and we gave them a beautiful room on
the second floor. They planned to stay a week or so, and I spent all
the time I could with the Master, while his wife went with Mama to
various shops and places of interest.
I was hoping he would mention a new trip, but as the visit took
place in the middle of the school year, I knew it was not likely to
happen. But this was the Master, so I knew something wonderful was
bound to happen even if we stay put.
And indeed it happened.
A couple of days later, the Master told me he wanted to
introduce me to some important people. I did not know what to
expect, and was rather surprised when he headed toward the suk, as
they called the market. What kind of important people could we
meet at the suk (Souk), I wondered, but said nothing and waited to
see what was going to happen.

I always loved visiting the suk. It was an extensive, ancient


marketplace, part of it in the open air, the other part, which was my
favorite, made up of narrow streets under massive arches of stone
that served as a roof. Each arch had carvings on it, either pictures or
letters, half rubbed off with age. The ground was covered with old,
irregular stone slabs.
The stores were narrow, each like a hole in the wall and secured
with heavy wooden doors. Many were very small, like tiny caves.
Others, though still narrow, were long and burrowed deep into the
buildings.
Even during daytime the suk was dark, so yellow lamps shed
intimate, golden light over the merchandise. Everything burst with
deep, glowing, jewel-toned colors.
Most of the vendors spread or hung the colorful objects around the
entrance, to entice the customers to come in.
Anything and everything was sold there – handmade rugs, silk
and cotton clothes, accessories, cosmetics, spices, pickles, sacks of
rice, beans, sugar, and coffee – anything you could think of.
Copperware shone softly under the glowing lights, wood and
leather furniture, inlaid with shells and mother-of-pearl, were piled
with gorgeous silver jewellery,
musical instruments produced a faint sound as the people pushed
against them, and the scents of coffee, spices, food, and heavy
perfumes lingered in the air. It was a place of magic.
We entered a shop that sold beautiful copperware and furniture
made of wood and inlaid with mother-of-pearl. Inside, he said a few
words in Arabic to the man who was sitting at the shop.
This was the first time I heard him speak Arabic; how many
languages did the Master speak, I wondered.
The Arab took us to the back of the shop, to a little room behind
a curtain. We entered, and inside sat a most imposing man, wearing
a blue Tuareg outfit and a large turban.
He was old and his beard was white, and to me he looked like a
mixture of a rabbi, a priest, and a patriarch, very different from the
sheiks and the clerics we saw in the street. I sensed that he was very
special.
As they were greeting each other in Arabic, I was surprised
that the Tuareg did not rise. Arabs are extremely polite and
hospitable, and it is unusual that a host would not get up to greet a
guest.
The Master introduced me, and we sat on a low divan across a
little table from the Tuareg. He offered us coffee, and one of the
workers in the shop came in with a tray, and poured it into three tiny
cups.
The Master and our host took their drink without sugar, but I
could not drink Turkish coffee like that since I found it very bitter,
and so I put some sugar into it.

When I finished my coffee, the Tuareg asked me to give him my


cup. He shook it a few times, allowing the coffee grounds and sugar
to spread themselves around the cup, and said, smiling, “I am going
to read your future.”
He started by telling me about my past, and what I was doing
now, all perfectly accurate. He proceeded to tell me a few things
about my doings in the future, then put the cup on the table. I was
terribly curious.
What was in the cup that could tell him so much? So I stood up
to pick the cup, but the Tuareg said, “no need to move, the cup will
come to you if you want it, since you are such a good boy.” The
Master said, “he really is a good boy,” which made me very proud,
but before I could thank him, the cup rose in the air and floated
toward me, and landed on in my lap. I looked at the Tuareg with
speechless amazement.
“We call this Tay Al Ard,” said the Tuareg. “It means, folding
of the Earth.” I did not know what to say, having never heard the
term. “You can pick up the cup now,” said the Tuareg. “What do you
want to do with it?”
“I just want to see the things you saw when you told me about
the past and the future,” I said. I looked inside, but the cup contained
nothing more than some coffee grounds and a bit of sticky sugar.
“There is only coffee mud inside!” I said, disappointed.
“Look again,” said the Tuareg.
I looked. The cup became very heavy. I put it in my lap, and
the mud inside started to move and fold, like a living creature. I
gazed at it, fascinated, but did not know what it meant.
“Can I take it home and show it to my mother?” I said. The
cup flew again and went to the table. No, it did not want to go home
with me.
The Master said, “This is your first lesson.” I had no idea what he
meant, and the two of them started to speak in a language I have
never heard before. Then the Master rose and told me it was time to
leave. The Tuareg said goodbye to me, very kindly, and I noticed that
again he did not rise.
In the street, I asked the Master, “Why did he not get up?
This is unusual, and in every other way he was so polite and kind.”

“He has been sitting like this for thirty years, Germain.”
“So he never leaves this room?” I asked, incredulously.
“He does leave the room when he goes to teach in a very
special school, which we call Ma’had. He teleports himself.”
“He can do that? He can fly through the air? Really?”
“He can do many unusual things. But he cannot walk.”
“What happened to him, Master?”
“Years ago, he had an accident and became paralyzed. He was
offered two options by some very special people. He could save his
body and walk again, or lose his body and acquire knowledge. He
chose knowledge and was initiated by these people into a secret
order of great scholars.”
“Who were they, Master?”
“They were Ulema, Germain, and he is an Ulema as well. The
Ulema are teachers of very secret and important knowledge.”
“And he lost his ability to walk?”
“His body was cut in half, Germain. He has no lower body at
all.”
“No lower body? He is just a half of a person?”
“Yes, he is just a half. That is why he cannot rise to greet his
guests.”
“So how does he live? How does he eat?”
“He does not need to eat. He could, perhaps, if he wanted to,
but he has no reason too.”
“But he drank coffee! Does he go to the bathroom?” The Master
laughed. “No, he does not need to go to the bathroom. Anything he
drinks evaporates from his body. When you have Tay Al Ard, you
don’t need a physical presence. It is no longer of any importance.”
I walked along, deep in thought. “Master,” I finally said, “you
said it was my first lesson. I suppose you mean the Tay Al Ard, but
this is not so. It was not my first lesson.” The Master gave me a
quick, searching look.
“What was your first lesson, then?” he asked quietly.
“The paper bird that you made in Benares. The one that
became a real bird and flew to the paper rose that also became a real
flower and attached itself to the rosebush.”
“I see,” said the Master. “So you figured it all out.”
“Yes, I think so,” I said. I did not add what I have realized,
and knew with an assurance that cannot be explained, then or now.
There was no need to say anything. The Master knew that I
understood that he, too, was an Ulema, and that he was doing me the
inconceivable honor of teaching me and giving me his friendship.
Why did he choose me?
What have I done to deserve such happiness?
I had no idea. I was only twelve years old, so I could not tell
where it started, and what all this would lead to in the future, but I
knew one thing with an absolute certainty – I was the luckiest boy in
the world.

*** *** ***

5. Folding the space:


Germain Lumiere continues:
“Tay Al Ard,” said the Master, “is the metaphysical experience that
produces a teleportation phenomenon.”
“Would I be able to do it?” I asked. I envisioned myself hopping at
will to every corner of the earth, not even bothering to pack.
“Perhaps some day. It is extremely complicated and sometimes
even dangerous. For the moment, I just want you to understand the
concepts.”
“Were did the teachings come from?”
“The Ulema learned it from Rou-hi-yin, who are supreme beings
that dwell in the fifth dimension. For many years, they practiced
peacefully all over the world.
When Islam came to the Middle East, the Prophet Muhammad
banned Tay Al Ard, and many of the Ulema teachers became
Allamah, prominent figures in letters, literature, science, and
religion.
However, not all of them renounced their Ulema identity. Those
who chose to remain Ulema, remained the custodians of the
Anunnakis’ secret knowledge and esoteric powers.
They joined the circle of Non-Muslim Ulema and the groups
shared their knowledge. This was common particularly among the
Sufis.”
“What do the words Tay Al Ard mean?” I asked.
“The words mean ‘the folding of space.’ To put it simply, you
traverse the earth without moving. Instead of physically moving from
one place to another, the enlightened persons do the exact opposite.
They bring the place they want to reach to where they stand. The
very earth of the place that they wanted to reach actually moves, and
is placed under their feet.”
“Can you see the earth as it moves?”
“Never. It happens in a blink of an eye, no matter how far the
destination is.”
“And only the Ulema know how to do it, Master?”
“That depends how you look at it. Under other names, the
phenomenon manifests itself in many other cultures. But some say
that all of the great people who practiced Tay Al Ard, such as the
great king Solomon from Judea, were secret Ulema anyway. It is well
known that King Solomon moved the throne of the Queen of Sheba
to his own palace so that she would feel at home during her visit with
him. The event was recorded by both Islamic and Jewish teachings.”
“Are there any scientific explanations as to how it works?” I asked.
The Master smiled. He saw I was already going in the right direction,
and it pleased him.
“This is a very good question,” He said. “It was once well put by
the Ulema Cheik Al Kabir. His exact words were: Time is represented
with two lines not perfectly aligned; one for you, the other for what is
not you. Space is represented with two circles, one for you, the other
for what is not you.
If you manage to place yourself between one of the two lines and
one of the two circles without touching the other line and the other
circle, you will conquer time-space.”
I considered this. “But time is not going in two lines, Master. It
goes straight from yesterday to tomorrow, through today, in one
line.”
“That is what most people think, but they are wrong, and great
thinkers understand the malleability of time and space. Sufis,
Gnostics, pre-Islamic, Islamic, and Jewish scholars, all wrote about
it. The Jewish Kabbalists, in particular, engaged themselves in the
study of Tay Al Ard, but had a different name for it, in Hebrew.
They called it Kefitzat Haderach, meaning, word by word, ‘the
jumping of the road,’ but translated as the ability to jump
instantaneously from one place to another or travel with unnatural
speed. It was widely documented by them.”
“What about modern scientists?” I asked.
“Einstein discussed it in a number of his papers, and it was a
component of his General Relativity Theory, relating to the warping
of space-time enabled by the effects of gravity.”
“I read fairy tales and science fiction stories about such things,” I
said.
“Of course you did. Fiction writers have been using it for many
years,” said the Master. “But it is based on truth.”
“But I still don’t understand the principle of it,” I said. “How does
the earth jump?”
“There are many explanations,” said the Master, “none of them
complete, since mysteries are sometimes only partially understood.
Look at it this way. Newtonian physics, which did not allow such
occurrences, were replaced long ago. Such things as wormholes, dark
matter, and space-time fluidity allow much more flexibility in
investigating teleportation. It is complicated.
For example, Quantum physics has proven that particles, such as
photons and atoms, can appear instantaneously at a new place
without traveling through space in any visible manner.
Perhaps this phenomenon is possible by encoding information about
an object, transmitting the information to another place, and
creating a copy of the original in the new location.”
“In this solution, then, the earth does not jump.”
“This is correct. But in both explanations the physical
phenomenon is similar, as it is based on the disintegration of the
atoms, those of the earth or those of the person, and their reassembly
at the place of destination. I see no true conflict here.”
“In the stories I read, the person just wishes to go somewhere, and
there he goes,” I said.
“Again, this is not a contradiction,” said the Master. “In Western
science it is now assumed that space does not have an objective
reality, and reality itself is thought of as observer-based and
subjective entity.
If so, then ideas such as traveling in space without actually
physically moving are no longer so strange. In this way, Tay Al Ard is
viewed as the manipulation of reality by the person who wishes to
travel from point one to point two in an environment that is subject
to the traveler’s will.”
“And so,” I said, “the idea is everywhere, stories, science, different
cultures, and you know many people who have done it. I suppose you
have done it too.”
“Yes, I have,” said the Master.
“Well, then,” I said, “why can’t I learn to do it right away?”
“Because a child might be hurt in some of the places you might
want to jump to, Germain. If the environment is not safe, and you
are even a little bit confused by it, you won’t be able to find your way
out and may even be killed. Let’s wait until you are an adult.”
“Ah, well,” I said resignedly. “I guess the trip I was planning to the
South Pole, to visit the penguins, must be postponed.”
“Just a few years,” said the Master.

*** *** ***

6. The amazing deeds of Anunnaki-Ulema Mordechai:


Note from A. Doudnikova:
Ulema Mordechai, a father figure to Germain Lumiere, and his
second Anunnaki-Ulema teacher came to visit with his mother, the
French Marquise and Germain in Paris, France.
Germain Lumiere is telling us wonderful stories about the
extraordinary deeds and things his teacher could do.

Lumiere said, verbatim:


Indeed. No one who had met Rabbi Mordechai even once could
forget him, anymore that you could forget an earthquake or a
typhoon. His energy, love of life, and powerful personality would
leave strong impression immediately on anyone who had the
pleasure of meeting him.
I remembered him very well, a large man with a long white
beard, with a booming voice and a hearty laugh, always cheerful,
always pleasant. I knew I would recognize him right away, and
looked forward to it. I went to Mama to inquire and she said, “Have I
forgotten to tell you? How could I? I must really be too busy if I could
do that. It will be such fun to see Rabbi Mordechai again.”
Two weeks later, around seven o’clock at night, I came home
from school. As soon as I opened the door, I heard a laugh that filled
the entire house, and I knew Rabbi Mordechai came. The house felt
different, as if the quiet atmosphere was charged by some extra
energy that was not there before.
I heard him calling me from the other room, booming at me as
soon as I closed the door, though how he knew it was me I could
never understand. “Finally you are here! I could not wait to see you!”
And a great big bear of a man rushed out of the living room and
hugged me with incredible strength. He let me go, held me at arm’s
length, and looked at me with his intense blue green eyes, so bright
that some people had difficultly looking at them and would lower
their own eyes when he looked at them.
He did not change at all, the white beard, long and thick,
almost reached his belt, and he still wore the dark suit that was his
signature. I remember him telling me that people who saw him from
the back, wearing this black coat, thought he was a priest, but as
soon as he turned, they would realize he must be a rabbi, but then
again, not quite…to me he looked like the personification of a
Russian peasant, but highly intellectual. Rabbi Mordechai was not
easy to categorize.
“You look well, my boy” he said, and I felt that his approval was
important, and was very happy to hear it. “You look wonderful too,
Rabbi,” I said. “I am so happy to see you again.”
“Don’t think that just because I did not see you for a few
years, I did not know what you were doing,” said Rabbi Mordechai.
“Our friend, Master Li, kept me abreast of your advancement. He is
very pleased with it.” A sudden suspicion occurred to me that their
connections with each other, and also with me and my mother, were
not accidental, but I did not know at that time how to connect the
dots, so I let it pass.
“I see you are still wearing your ring, Rabbi,” I said, laughing.
I used to be fascinated with his ring. It was a heavy ring set with a
green topaz, which could be opened to reveal a secret compartment.
Inside, he kept a dry bean, on which he wrote, in miniature, the
entire Torah. “Is the bean still there?” I continued. “Of course,” said
Rabbi Mordechai. “I need the Torah with me all the time.”
“And where have you been all these years?”
“Mostly in Estonia and Lithuania,” he said. “So much help is
needed under the Soviets… such poor people, starving, homeless. I
built towns for them.”
“You built towns?” I asked, incredulously. How could one
man build towns?
“Oh yes, I’ll tell you about it later,” he said casually. “It’s a
long story, and we should not keep your mother waiting.”
We returned to the living room, where Mama was pouring
out some drinks for us to have before we went in for dinner. “Now,
my dear Madame Lumière, don’t you think you need a mezuzah?
Where is your mezuzah? I did not see one when I came in.”
“Please, Rabbi, with all due respect, I don’t need any religious
objects in this house,” said Mama, sighing, and handed him his
drink. “They never did me much good, to say the least.”
“Ah, you will think differently about the kind of mezuzah I
am talking about…” and he pulled out of his pocket a mezuzah and
put it on the table. It was covered by blue and white diamonds of the
first quality. Mama picked it up and looked at it, amazed.
“Well!” she said, “Perhaps I should change my mind… Shall I
put it in my bedroom? It won’t be safe to keep a thing like that on the
front door.”
“You can’t even carry it to your bedroom, Madame Lumière,”
he said, his blue green eyes twinkling with amusement. “It’s much
too heavy.”
I saw Mama looking at the mezuzah that she was still holding in
total amazement. It seemed to be pushing her hand down, getting
heavier and heavier. She placed it on the table, unable to hold it any
longer. I tried to pick it up, and Rabbi Mordechai said, “Didn’t you
learn anything in Damascus? Don’t you remember what happened
when you tried to grab such a thing?”
I suddenly remembered the coffee cup I drank from when I
visited the Tuareg in the suk in Damascus, as a child. The mezuzah
had to be the same type of enchanted object, with a mind of its own.
Rabbi Mordechai looked at the mezuzah, and just like the cup,
it jumped into my lap. I did not touch it, and did not quite know what
to do.
What’s more, I was a little uncomfortable about his knowledge
regarding my visit to the Tuareg. How did he know? I looked at him
with some suspicion and he burst out laughing, and gently slapped
my face. “I know a lot of things,” he said. “I told you, I have watched
over your advancement for years.”
Mama ignored this exchange and said, “Why don’t you take
care of my arthritis instead of playing such tricks, if you are so
powerful? I could not hold on to it, it was too heavy for my arms.”
“This has nothing to do with arthritis, it really is just a trick of
sorts. You can put it back on the table, Germain, it won’t bite.” I did
and he put it back in his pocket, and we went to dinner.

After dinner, Mama, who was extremely tired after a long day
at work, excused herself and retired to her own room. Rabbi
Mordechai and I went to the library. “Now, he said, “let’s go back to
the issue of the mezuzah, shall we? Look.” He took it out of his
pocket and gave it to me. It was definitely the same mezuzah, but not
a single diamond remained on it, and it seemed to be made of
copper. “You see, using these tricks was the way I could help those
poor people in Estonia and Lithuania. I can change metals, and other
substances, into gold, diamonds, or other precious stones, as
needed.”
“So you put the diamonds in the mezuzah for a limited period
of time?”
“Not exactly. I did not really have to put them in. When
performing this trick, the person involved usually sees the physical
object or property he or she lost and could not regain. Your mother
lost her diamonds in the war, and her vision of the diamonds affected
the mezuzah.
You never lost anything of a material nature, so now, while not
influenced by her vision, you are seeing plain metal. It’s much like a
crystal ball. People see different things when they look into the same
crystal ball, since it reflects their minds. If you were ill, you would see
something related to illness and recovery.
Had your mother’s arthritis been really bad, she would have seen
something related to it, rather than the diamonds. Fortunately, her
arthritis is very mild.
I needed to build houses for the people in Estonia and
Lithuania. Most of the people from whom I needed to buy materials
or get licenses, lost money in the past.
So if I put anything on the table in front of them, lets say some
leaves, or paper, they saw money, took it, and let me have anything I
needed.”
“And would the money disappear?”
“Sometimes, but not in a way that could incriminate me.
Also, if they were good people, they could keep it.”
I was silent. Something strange was happening here, I thought.
Why is he telling me all these things? There had to be some plan,
some pattern, to his sudden appearance…
“I am going to give you this mezuzah,” he said. “Carry it with
you. When you are in trouble, real trouble, look at it, and you may be
able to see the solution to your problem.

It has a great secret, look.” He held it in his hand, and with the
other hand, opened an invisible compartment, then closed it. “Now,”
he said, “Try to open it.”
I took the mezuzah and there was simply no compartment to be
found. The mezuzah was seamless. I looked at him with amazement.
“The compartment will only open three times in your
lifetime. It will grant you three wishes. One of them, the last one, will
be the ultimate request, relating to life and death. Before that, one
wish will be used for yourself, the other for someone else. If you ask
for help and the compartment opens, this is the sign that the wish
will be granted. Now take it and put it in your pocket.”
“Rabbi Mordechai,” I said, putting the mezuzah in my pocket,
“You have great powers, don’t you?”
“I plan to teach you a great deal of these powers,” he said
without elaborating. “Now, off to sleep! I am an old man and it is
three o’clock in the morning!”
I could not sleep, this was really exciting.
Why was Rabbi Mordechai planning to teach me?
Was this the plan?
What about the Master?
There were so many questions. But before trying to resolve
anything else, I decided I had to find out what this mysterious
mezuzah was made of.

I had a friend in the Institut Pasteur, a scientist, who in turn


had a friend who worked in a military lab. Next morning, my friend
and I went to the lab, and let the military man look at it. He took
preliminary measurements, so as to coordinate weight to size, and
then put the mezuzah on a scale, matching it to a light weight that
should have worked against a small copper object. But it did not
work.
To our surprise, the mezuzah’s side of the scales sank down
immediately as if it were much heavier than the weight. The military
man fixed the scales and tried again, with the same results.
“This object is registering 20 kilograms,” he said. “But it cannot
be. A small object made of copper could not weigh that much under
any circumstances. I don’t know how to proceed.” My friend from the
Institut Pasteur picked it up, and it was extremely light again. “This
is bizarre,” said my friend. “No point in going on, it won’t work. Let’s
go home.”
I took the mezuzah home. Rabbi Mordechai was there, and
somehow he knew where I was.
I can’t imagine how he knew, since I told no one at home about
my plans, but eventually I got used to his ability to find out where I
went. He looked sad. “That was not good, son. You could have asked
me any questions you wanted about the mezuzah, but instead you
went to the military.
That is not good.” he seemed upset about it and I felt like a real
fool and apologized. “Well,” he said, “never mind. Put on your hat
and coat. I have got something to show you. We are going to visit an
old friend of mine, I often stay with him when I am in Paris.”
We went to a small house in a quiet side street near Avenue
Victor Hugo, and a pleasant little man opened the door and greeted
us warmly. Rabbi Mordechai introduced him as Mr. Markowitch. He
took us into a modest living room, and opened a bottle of Calvados.
We sat comfortably, sipping our drinks, and Rabbi Mordechai
said, “Son, not even the biggest scientist in France knows as much as
this gentleman who is right here with us.”
Mr. Markowitch smiled in a deprecating way, and said, “No, no.
I am nothing special…”
Rabbi Mordechai waved his hand, dismissing Mr. Markowitch’s
modesty. “I say, my friend, would you mind showing your laboratory
to Germain?”
Not at all,” said Mr. Markowitch. “I will be delighted to show it
to him.” We went into the basement, which was large and comprised
of several rooms. Mr. Markowitch opened a door, and stood aside to
let up pass.
What I saw there was in such complete contradiction to the
simple living room that I gasped.
The room was a combination of a movie set and a medieval
laboratory, large, messy, dusty, and full of tubes, flasks, bottles,
boiling water, and steam.
I smelled something boiling, burning metals, and other strange
odors. What in the world was this? Suddenly I had a hunch. “Are you
an alchemist?” I asked, bewildered.
“Not exactly,” said Mr. Markowitch. “I am only a transmutist,
though I do my best to work for the benefit of humanity. Rabbi
Mordechai is an alchemist, though. The greatest alchemist I have
ever known.” That was something to digest. I knew Rabbi Mordechai
was many things, but an alchemist was not something I expected.
“There is a difference? Don’t both professionals try to
transmute metals?” I asked.
“Yes and no. The alchemists are of a higher level. They can
transmute metals into pure gold, and also can produce the Elixir of
Life. The transmutists can change substances into any metal other
than gold, and we cannot manufacture the Elixir of Life.”
“I see,” I said, not quite sure if I understood the implications.
“Look at this,” said Mr. Markowitch. He opened a drawer of a
big table and took out a chunk of raw gold. He looked at it
affectionately. “This is Rabbi Mordechai’s first gift to me,” he said.
“The first of many. I would not sell this one for anything… he did not
even have a bank account at the time, would you believe it? And he
produced this beautiful gold for me. He never thinks about himself.”
“So what do you do, Mr. Markowitch?” I asked, curious.
“I work for a French-Swiss pharmaceutical company as a
chemist. That is my regular job. But I am also trying to work for
myself, by creating a formula for a wonderful perfume.
Rabbi Mordechai helped me all along, and if everything turns
out well I will be able to make a lot of money. That would be so nice.
Anyway, let Rabbi Mordechai show you his own workshop, which he
uses whenever he comes to Paris.”
He went upstairs, and we entered Rabbi Mordechai’s room,
which stood in complete contrast to his friend’s medieval lair. No
tubes, no containers of any sort, nothing was boiling or steaming in
this room. On the left side he had a large, old fashioned wooden
table. Next to it stood a machine with a glass top, the likes of which I
have never seen.
A bed stood under an arch window. Next to it was placed a
large sofa. On the right side stood two tall bookcases, and between
them, a metal armoire, entirely modern, unlike the wooden country
table.
I commented on the lovely Bohemian crystal chandelier, and Rabbi
Mordechai told me he got it in Yugoslavia.
“Shall we have some coffee?” asked Rabbi Mordechai. He
went to a kitchenette-like corner, fitted with a few shelves and a sink,
and started preparing strong Turkish coffee.
Settling comfortably in his chair and sipping his coffee,
Rabbi Mordechai said, “And now, I promised to tell you the story of
the houses I built. Do you want to hear it?”
“Oh, yes, I do,” I said. “I am not sure what you mean by
building houses. I had no idea you worked in this line.”
“Well, I built houses, but I never laid my hands on a stone or
a brick,” he said, his bright eyes twinkling with amusement.
“So you supervised their construction? Like an architect?”
“Well, maybe it could be described this way… You will be the
judge. You see, the people I wanted to help were poor peasants. They
had no money at all, they ate meat once a year, maybe, and some of
them lived in groups of eight to ten in one small shack. I decided I
had to build them more houses, give them decent living conditions.
Luckily, there was a piece of land in the vicinity that did not
belong to anyone. I went to look at it, make sure there was water
around so we could dig a good well.
I found plenty of water, decided it was the right place, and then,
boom! Overnight, I built them ten houses. Come to think of it, I had
some preliminary preparations to do, so it really was not exactly
overnight, but more like twenty-four hours.”
“But it takes more than twenty-four hours to build even a
single room, let alone ten houses! Did you have hundreds of people
to help you?”
“The work was done by four individuals and one enormous
blanket,” said Rabbi Mordechai. “Getting them was what I referred
to as preliminary preparations.”
“Did you say blanket, Rabbi Mordechai, or did I misunderstand you?
What does a blanket have to do with building houses?”
“No, you heard me right. The four individuals did not wish to
be observed as they were building the houses.”
I sat there, watching him a bit suspiciously. Was he trying to
confuse me, see how I would react to this fairytale? Or perhaps it was
some sort of a test? Or maybe I was just so stupid that I did not
understand?
Rabbi Mordechai looked at me and said, “I can see that you feel that
four are not enough to build ten houses overnight, right?”
“No way,” I said.
“For a really important good cause, Germain, I can use one
individual to build something bigger than the Eiffel Tower, and in
seconds.”
Rabbi Mordechai was never drunk. My mother told me that he
was a real “Russian bear” and could polish a whole bottle without
any effects. So obviously he could not be drunk now, when all I saw
him take was Turkish coffee.
But for a few moments I seriously suspected that he was. Nor
was he crazy.
So what nonsense was he telling me? And then I suddenly
remembered something that Mr. Markowitch said.
Rabbi Mordechai, he said, was an alchemist. It had little to do with
building houses, but still, as an alchemist, he had powers. And then
something else connected to it in my mind.
He never said his helpers were four people. He said they were
four individuals. Could these individuals be like the Afrit I saw in
Baalbeck?
The thought was so sudden, so disturbing, that I was startled
and looked at him with apprehension, and I think he read my mind
because he said, “No, they are not what you think. Not like those you
saw in Baalbeck, anyway. There are other sorts, you know.”
“I had no idea that you knew about my meeting with the
Afrit,” I said. “How did you know I was thinking about them,
anyway? Do you read my mind?”
“No, no. I don’t read your mind, but what you thought was
very clear and showed on your face. The Master told me all about
your education, remember?
And I know that the first meeting with the Afrit would make a
strong impression on anyone. Anyway, my individuals were much
better than the Afrit you met. All Afrit are basically stupid, but mine,
at least, listened and obeyed.”
“Are they spirits, are they humans, part human? What are
they?” I asked.
“Mine are called Ghooliim.”
“This strange name sounds somewhat familiar,” I said, “but I
can’t quite place it.”
“Yes, you are right, and this is a very good observation! I am
pleased to see that you can make good connections in your mind.
Indeed, the Ghooliim are part animal, part human, part Golem,
part Ghoul. A hybrid race. They are made of clay, or earth materials,
much like you and me, but they have certain physical differences
from both humans and animals. For example, they are born full
adult. They are sensitive to light, by the way, so they work only by
night, but they are nevertheless great engineers.”
“Where do you find them?” I asked.
“I make them,” said Rabbi Mordechai.
“You make them? Really? So they are like machines? Robots?”
“They look exactly like you and me, they have eyes, hands,
feet, etc. They are not at all like machines or robots. You will not
think them anything but human if you saw them.”
I leaned forward in my chair, shaken by what I was beginning
to understand. Can he do the impossible, can he be playing God? “So
you actually create living, breathing, thinking creatures? The Afrit I
met where merely conjured spirits, but you are talking about
something else, I think. A different level of beings.”
“When the Ulema, and some Kabbalists, reach the holy level
of Kadash Daraja, they can create life.
Real life. The creatures would function much like human
beings, but they have three deep fundamental differences. They don’t
have a soul, they don’t have a physical heart that functions like a
blood pump, and they don’t have a wired brain. Also, their essence
comes from another dimension, to which they return after their task
is done.
They are created for that task, and that is their only purpose.
The creator tells them what to do, and they do it right away. In my
case, I have created these four Ghooliim to build the houses, and they
did it very nicely, overnight.”
“Can you tell me how you create them?”
“I create each of the Ghooliim separately. For each, I bring
with me seven pieces of papers on which I write certain codes, and I
have to have my cane with me. Then I take soil, earth, or clay, and
pour water on it to make it pliable. Once it’s the right consistency, I
mold it into a ball.
I turn off most of the lights, leaving a very low illumination,
maybe one candle or a small lamp, and pull back about four to five
feet. I then read a certain text that would encourage the ball to take
the next step, which is to shape itself into an oblong of about four
feet, and be ready to follow my special design.

At that point I take my cane, walk to the other side of the


oblong, dip the cane into the oblong, and stretch it. I command the
oblong to duplicate a human form, and it becomes a statue, lifeless,
but similar in every way to the human form.
I take the seven pieces of paper, and put two in the eyes, two in
the ears, one in the mouth, and one on the breast, over the heart. I
roll the seventh piece as if it were a homemade cigarette, go to the
other side of the statue, and throw the rolled paper at it. It always
lands either in the nose or between the feet, and either position is
correct.
The statue starts to move and attempts to stand up. At this time
I turn around and leave the room for a few minutes, so as not to look
at the statue as it comes to life. Seeing the actual transformation is
forbidden by the Code of the Ulema, as stated in the Book of Rama
Dosh.
I stand behind the door of the room, and wait until I hear the
creature make a sound, which tells me that the procedure is
complete. I go back into the room, welcome the creature, give it
clothes to wear, and pull out all the papers, to keep safely until such
time as they are needed to disassemble the creature and send its
essence back to its original dimension.”
“And you do that after the task is done.”
“Right, since the Ghooliim are created to perform a single
task. When the task is accomplished, I ask the Ghooliim to lie on the
floor, next to each other, return the pieces of paper with the codes to
the correct places, and pour water over the bodies of the Ghooliim.
The bodies disappear, leaving earth on the floor, and the essence
goes back to where it came from.”
“Do they always go away peacefully?” I asked.
“No, sometimes they develop a personality, if the task is a bit
longer, and they have the delusion of being human and want to stay
in our dimension. Of course it would be cruel and inhuman to let
them stay, not to mention dangerous, but they do become tricky.
So the Ulema or Kabbalist must be even trickier, and hypnotize
the creature into deep sleep. We then put the papers where they
belong and set the paper on fire, and the body start smouldering. At
that time, we pour the water over the Ghooliim and they disappear.”
“Fascinating,” I said. “I would love to witness the procedure,
though I admit some of it would be terrifying. Thinking of the
creature stumbling to its feet, trying to get up, in a dark room… still,
I wish I could witness that.
“You will do better than just witnessing. At the right time I will
teach you the whole process, including the codes and the text that
needs to be said,” promised Rabbi Mordechai.
“I will know how to create life? Really?” I said incredulously.
“Why not? Once initiated, you will advance. I tell you, think big!
Expect everything! Grow! That is what I hope you will do. Anyway,
the houses were built very nicely by these obliging Ghooliim.”
“And then?”
“The next morning, very early, I went to inspect the houses,
and removed the great blanket that covered the area.”
“What is this blanket?” I asked. “We are not talking about a real
blanket, right?”
“No, it is a large plasmic sheet that can create a shield of
invisibility over the entire area. We just refer to it as a ‘blanket’
because it’s a short and easy name. Anyway, someone saw the houses
and informed the police, and soon enough I saw them advancing on
me. Luckily, the captain was an old friend, Sergei, and he had two
policemen with him.
“‘What is this?’ he asked me, surprised. He knew the area well
and these houses did not exist the day before.
‘These are houses,’ I said.
‘Well, I see that, but how come? How did you occupy the
land, how did you build, and what about a license? Surely you don’t
have one? And who did you build it for? You know very well that you
will have to abandon this property right away, you have no right to
it,’ said Sergei.
‘Sergei, my friend, you are asking too many questions…’ I
said. ‘When your wife was dying, and the doctors gave up on her, do
you remember who saved her life?’
‘Why, it was you, Rabbi Mordechai,’ said Sergei. ‘Do you
think I would ever forget that? Or my wife, for that matter? She
never stops praising your name.’
‘And did you ask any questions then? No, you were too happy
to see her well. And anyway, if you had asked, I would not know how
to explain it to you.’
‘You just touched her, and she stood up,’ said Sergei. ‘It
looked like a miracle, so I did not want to interfere…’”

That rang a bell. I remembered something. “Wait!’ I said to


Rabbi Mordechai, interrupting his narrative. ‘That is exactly what the
Master did for the sick nun, Sister Marie-Ange Gabrielle, who stayed
in our house many years ago, before we went to Damascus…’
“Very likely,” said Rabbi Mordechai. “I am sure no one asked
too many questions then, either. Anyway, I told Sergei that I have
done much more than just touch his wife, and I put my hand on his
shoulder, and explained something very important to him.
‘Sergei, everything and anyone I touch, I only do it for
humanity’s good. These houses are for poor old people who have no
place to live properly. And if I tried to explain to you how I built
them in one day, you would not believe me.’
‘Problem is, Rabbi Mordechai, is that after what happened
with my wife, I would believe you… I don’t know what to do,’ said
Sergei.
‘You know that sometimes my methods cannot be explained.
Remember when your daughter Irina was having trouble getting into
the University?
Remember how I transferred the money and got her registered
from a distance, and when she got back to the University the next
day the secretary was amazed to see that all was written properly in
her log and Irina was a registered student who had paid her bills,
overnight?
So I say, don’t ask questions, Sergei. What does it matter? The
houses are here now. But you have no reason to worry. If needed, I
can make the houses disappear. Close your eyes for just a minute.’
Sergei closed his eyes, and I restored the blanket. ‘Open them
now, Sergei.’ He did, and practically jumped, so surprised he was.
The houses were not there. The two policemen were so scared
by this phenomenon that they dropped their guns and ran away.
Sergei stepped over and picked up the guns, automatically, staring at
the direction of the houses that were not there.
‘The fools,’ he said, almost to himself. ‘They probably think it’s
the Devil’s work… But Rabbi Mordechai, all your work! Making it
disappear like that. How? Why?’
‘I can bring them back,’ I said. ‘If you close your eyes again, I
will do so.’ He did, and the houses returned. Sergei was shaken.
‘You are playing with my head, Rabbi Mordechai. Are you
trying to scare me?’ said Sergei. ‘I know you are not the Devil, but
honestly… So you can make them disappear and appear at will?
Won’t it be dangerous to the people inside?’
‘No, I can get them out first,’ I said.
‘But what if my supervisors hear about it and come to
inspect?’
‘You will give me warning, and I’ll make the houses
disappear.’
‘Ah, well,’ said Sergei, giving up. ‘I’ll close my eyes to the
whole thing and tell my policemen that if they don’t shut up the Devil
will get them.’”
“What a story,” I said. “And did any trouble follow these
events”
“No. Strangely enough, nothing ever happened to disturb the
people I moved into these houses. Somehow, the police never talked,
and the occupants were safe. Of course, such houses, built by
supernatural phenomena, are not permanent. They last ten, fifteen
years, no more.
But when they disappear, I will find another solution. Anyway,
Germain, I have other, very important things to tell you. Are you
beginning to realize who and what I am?”
“I suspect you are an Ulema, Rabbi Mordechai, as well as an
alchemist and a Kabbalist. Too much coincidence if you are not
Ulema…”

Rabbi Mordechai laughed loudly and clapped his hands. “What a


boy. He is not stupid, after all…”

*** *** ***


Here are some fabulous stories told by Germain Lumiere
who is now visiting Ulema Mordechai in Budapest,
Hungary.

______________________
Germain Lumiere said, verbatim:
Budapest is an interesting city in its design, since it is really
comprised of two separate entities. The River Danube flows into the
city from north to south. Buda, the residential area, is situated on the
hills to the West. Pest, the commercial area, is located on a flat plain.
Rabbi Mordechai’s house was located in a quiet street in Buda.
It was a typically large, three storied, Eastern European stone house,
with low windows secured with metal bars. Inside, the place was
simply and comfortably furnished, and my room, where he took me
to put down the suitcase, was indeed spacious and pleasant.
A charming rounded wood burning stove was standing there,
though being summer, it was not lit. A large, old fashioned dark
wood armoire, beautifully carved, probably 18th Century, a bed piled
with pillows and standing under the window, and a desk with a chair,
completed the furniture.
The window overlooked a big, lush garden.
I expected Rabbi Mordechai to have a lab, perhaps with a
machine that could transmute drawings into gold, like the one he
had in Mr. Markowitch’s house in Paris, but he did not have either.
His work, apparently, was done in the library, a large room lined
with books on all sides. It had a couple of big wooden tables heaped
with more books, papers, and writing implements, and several
comfortable old armchairs for reading.
He left me there, and went to get us coffee and lunch. I
suspected, quite correctly, that during my stay in Budapest I would
be spending most of my time in that room, so I started to walk
around, checked the eclectic collection of books of so many subjects
that they would make an ordinary person’s head spin, and admired a
large and handsome old globe that stood on one of the tables.
I always liked globes, so I gave this one a twirl with my finger,
and watched it spin.
“Which country did you hit on with your finger?” asked Rabbi
Mordechai, entering the room with a tray just as I was doing it.
“I have no idea,” I said, surprised. Does it matter? I was just
playing…”
Rabbi Mordechai looked at me with a mysterious air. “Yes,
sometimes it does,” he said, smiling benevolently at me. “We are
going to do some interesting things with this globe. Come, eat, you
must be starving after the long trip!” I had no objection and came to
the table. Rabbi Mordechai swept aside a stack of papers, put a few
books on the floor, and poured me a cup of excellent Turkish coffee.
The light meal was very tasty, with delicious olives from Klamata,
which, he told me, were given to him by an old Greek gentleman as a
token of friendship, good bread, and a white, spicy cheese, made into
small balls that floated in olive oil. The cheese, he said, was brought
by another friend, an old woman from Albania. “Yes,” he said.
“These are good, old-fashioned people, they show their love by
bringing such nice gifts, how could I refuse? I do my best for them in
return. It’s the way people used to live in villages, in the old days,
helping each other, bringing gifts…”
“I imagine you do a lot more for them than they do for you,
Rabbi Mordechai, knowing your record of helping people. But still,
it’s nice, you don’t have to do a lot of shopping,” I said. “And it’s very
kind of them.”
“Yes, what do I need? As you know, I am a vegetarian just like
you and your family, and I never touch meat or fish. All I need, after I
get such delicacies as gifts, is bread, rice, and beans, since I grow all
the fruit and vegetables I eat in my garden. For me, the simple life is
best.” It was an interesting comment, since I knew he could live like a
Sultan from the Arabian Nights tales if he so wished, being able to
manufacture gold at will.
But the Ulema view luxury as childish toys, and only indulge in
it if there is a need or a cause that demands it. However, as for the
food, it turned out he was a superb cook. With simple ingredients
and a kitchen that did not have elaborate and fancy tools, he could
create meals that would be fit for royalty.
I learned a lot of cooking from him and valued the skill very
much over the years, particularly when I could later surprise guests
who thought vegetarian eating was
dull, by presenting them with a vegetarian banquet, cooked by
myself, that would amaze them with its variety, colors and delicate
taste and style.
When we finished the meal, I helped him stack the dishes on
the tray, and asked, “Where is the kitchen? I’ll go and wash up.”
“I’d better show you,” he said. We went into the living room,
and in the far side of it was a heavy wooden door. “Watch out, there
are three stairs here,” he said, as he opened the door. The kitchen, at
this lower level, was quite large, but extremely primitive. I wanted to
put the olive jar and the cheese in the refrigerator, but as I looked
around for it, I did not see one.
“Where is the refrigerator?” I asked.
“I don’t have one,” he said.
“So where do you store the food?” I asked, surprised, still
holding the tray and not knowing where to put it.
“On this table,” he said. I looked, and saw a table piled with
vegetables, more cheese, bread, and many other foodstuffs. “But
doesn’t the food spoil much quicker, without a refrigerator? If they
are not available here, can’t people get iceboxes, at least?”
“Well, yes, many people do,” said Rabbi Mordechai, smiling
at some funny idea of his own that I did not understand, “but I don’t
need one. Take a look at these things, they are much better.” He
pointed to three small objects that stood on the table around the
food. They were made of crystal, and shaped like pyramids. I had no
idea what purpose they served.
“Let me show you. Put the tray on the chair next to the table,
then take the olive and cheese jars and put them somewhere between
these triangles,” he said. I assumed that by saying “triangles” he
meant the crystal pyramids, so just as he said, I went to the table, put
the tray on the chair, and placed the jars at the center of the table,
between the pyramids.
I was startled by the sensation of extreme cold that enveloped
my hands and arms as I placed the jars on the table. The atmosphere
in the room was comfortably warm.
The atmosphere between the crystal pyramids was icy cold, as
cold as a freezer. Rabbi Mordechai laughed aloud and beat the arm of
the chair, making the dishes rattle alarmingly. “There are other
options than technology,” he said. “The triangles keep the food fresh
much longer…”
“You are playing tricks again!” I accused him, jokingly.
“Why not?” he said, smiling. “Knowledge does not have to
take away your sense of humor, son! Life is fun!”
Indeed life with Rabbi Mordechai was always fun, even though
we studied very hard, every day, all day long. My only complaint was
that sometimes he would be argumentative and use semantics that
did not make sense to me, but the work itself was so interesting and
engaging that it did not matter. Also, I felt that some of the
techniques he demonstrated to me were simply tricks used to show
off, though now I realize how wrong I was. Well, I was young, I
suppose, and naturally there was much I could not understand.
Around six o’clock we usually had our dinner, then went out for a
walk, and he showed me a lot of the beautiful sights of Budapest.
Time passed quickly.
I have learned so much, everything of which, Rabbi Mordechai
promised, would enable me to succeed in my meeting with the Pères
du Triangle, and later in all my endeavors in life. But something, I
knew, was still missing, and I was very hesitant asking about it. One
day I gathered all my courage and asked him, “What about the
opening of the Conduit?”
“It will happen soon enough,” he said.
“But is there work to be done in preparation? What is the
process?”
“It varies,” said Rabbi Mordechai. “Come on, let’s go out, you
are tired from so much study.” I certainly was, since that evening we
continued working after our dinner, having been engaged in an
interesting study, so we did not go to our usual walk. It was rather
late at night, and I felt I would enjoy a little fresh air. “Let’s go to one
of the bridges between Buda and Pest,” said Rabbi Mordechai. “It’s a
pleasant night for a walk.”
“Which one should we go to?” I asked.
“Let’s go to the Széchenyi Lánchíd, the Chain Bridge,” said
Rabbi Mordechai. I certainly had no objection to that; this bridge
was a thing of beauty. It was called after Count Istvan Széchenyi, who
had commissioned it, and was the first of the eight permanent
bridges in the city. The Count invested much thought and effort in
building the bridge.
He not only asked a French authority, Marc Isambard Brunel,
for advice, but even went to examine William Tierney Clark’s bridge
across the Thames at Marlow, England, before finalizing his plans.
The bridge was built between 1839 and 1849, and the stunning lions
at each end were designed by the great sculptor, János Marschalko.
There is a great debate regarding the lions’ tongues. Some say
that they are there, though extremely hard to find even if you climb
all the way up the pedestals on the four corners of the bridge.
Others say there are no tongues at all, and tell a legend that
during the opening ceremony, a little boy noticed that the tongues
were not there, and told the sculptor. Poor Marschalko was so
distraught by realizing he had forgotten such an important detail,
that he hurled himself off the bridge to his death.
It was late at night, there was no one present on the bridge,
and the lights of the city reflected beautifully in the dark water. We
stood for a moment, enjoying the sight, and then Rabbi Mordechai
said, quite suddenly, “How long do you think it will take you to cross
the bridge?”
“I don’t know,” I said, trying to estimate the length.
“Would you like to bet I can do it quicker than you?” he asked, his
blue green eyes twinkling with amusement.
“Sure,” I said, laughing. “Why not?”
“Good,” he said. “But you must walk straight and not look
back or even to the sides.” I knew he had something up his sleeve,
but it was fun to play the game. “Very well,” I said. “Shall I start?”
“Go!” he said, laughing, and I started walking, looking ahead,
avoiding looking back or to the sides. When I reached the end of the
bridge, Rabbi Mordechai was standing there, leaning against it,
smiling.
“I see,” I said. “Very impressive. I would like to learn this
technique.”
“I am happy to hear that you are not calling it a trick,” said
Rabbi Mordechai, seriously.
“No, I don’t think this is a trick,” I said. I felt a vague regret.
Have I let Rabbi Mordechai down by being skeptical? Were there
some subtle points I have missed?
“Let’s go to the other side,” he said. “Would you like to try
how this technique feels?”
“Yes, I would,” I said. In a fraction of a second, I was on the
other side of the bridge, without any delay or even any sensation. I
was just there, while a second ago, I was elsewhere. Rabbi Mordechai
was not near me. I looked at the bridge, and I saw him walking
toward me.
Obviously, he wanted to show me that I was not hallucinating.
If we were both transported together, I might have suspected that we
never really left and it was only some sort of hallucination, another
trick, but seeing Rabbi Mordechai walking on the bridge would
prevent any such suspicion. He wanted to reassure me, as I thought.
I had shown a sad lack of trust, and perhaps I had hurt this great,
forgiving, loving friend who would do anything for me. How could I?
I felt so ashamed.
When he came to the other side, I said, “Rabbi Mordechai, I
know why you transported me and walked yourself. I understand
your motive. But it is no longer necessary to do so. I fully trust you. I
am your student, forever.”
Rabbi Mordechai looked at me with tears in his eyes, and
hugged me with all his might. “You are more than my student,
Germain. You are my son from now on.” A great wave of happiness
and peace flowed through me. He was not angry, he understood, he
knew I placed all my trust in him and I was forgiven…
Suddenly, I felt something I could not explain, something that
happened in my mind, or in my brain, or in my soul, something that
I could not prove but was as tangible as the river and the houses. The
ability to trust I have so suddenly discovered in myself burst open
the gates in my mind, and my Conduit opened.
I staggered a little, caught on to the bridge, and recovered
almost instantly. The world felt different than before, but I was still
myself.
“How did it happen so fast?” I asked.
“It was not fast at all,” said Rabbi Mordechai. “It was exactly
as it should be, as it always is, and always will be. You see, your other
masters taught you many things, and there was an enormous amount
of dormant knowledge which was accumulated in your mind and
constantly fed by them.
And now, at the right time, and under the right circumstances, and
encouraged by your ability to accept the Ulema way, the Conduit
opened, by itself, like a flower. You are now ready to start on the road
to being full- fledged Ulema. Welcome, my son.”
Note: In addition to all those beautiful and extraordinary “things” an
Anunnaki-Ulema can do, here is a synopsis of some of their most
intriguing and fabulous capabilities:
1. Learning a new language in less than two hours.
2. Seeing very clearly in the dark.
3. Controlling the heart rhythm/speed.
4. Reading others’ thoughts.
5. Seeing others’ aura.
6. Stopping external bleeding instantly.
7. Seeing a certain number of future events. (Not predicting!)
8. Fully controlling physical pain.
9. Looking young (approximately 37) permanently. Stopping
the physical appearances of aging.
10. Sensing and understanding bad and good vibes, and how to
block the effects of negative vibes.
11. Moving objects at distance.
12. Teleportation.
13. Traversing solid objects, such as walls.
14. Finishing multiple tasks fifty times faster than others.
15. Recovering from injuries in an amazing speed.
16. Influencing others in decision making, though only for a good
purpose.
17. Controlling electrical and electronic supplies and gadgets
18. Reading a big book in minutes.
19. Acquiring the healing touch.
20. Communicating through telepathy (sending and receiving
messages).
21. Entering and exiting parallel dimensions.
22. Communicating with the Double.
23. Communicating with a deceased person during the 40 days
period following his/her death.
24. Communicating with animals.
25. Partially changing the molecular properties of objects and
substances.

*** *** ***

48. Brain “The Supersymetric Mind”

Study of the influence of the Anunnaki’s programming of our


brain and fate.

 I. Introduction
 II. Excerpts from Ulema Sorenztein’s Kira’at
 III. The Supersymetric Mind
 a. A brief note on supersymetry
 b. What is a “Supersymetric Mind”?

__________________________
I. Introduction:
Honorable Ulema Sorenstein once said, “…in many cases, some
people are responsible for their own bad luck and failure in life. It all
depends on what you put in your Araya/Conduit brain zones.”
He added: “Even though, the human mind was created the way the
Anunnaki wanted it, and even though, your brain had been
programmed and fashioned 65,000 years ago, and “upgraded” and
reconditioned by the Anunnaki some 6,000 to 7,000 years ago, you
can still bring important changes to your mind, and make it work for
you like a charm.”

He continued:
“Everything depends on:

 1-How to store your ideas and thoughts in your brain;


 2-Which idea, thought, or vision will you consciously allow to
enter your brain;
 3-How to control the vibrations of your ideas, visions, and
thoughts;
 4-How to scan your ideas, visions, and thoughts that are
stored on the Araya net;
 5-How to stabilize the vibrations of your mind;
 6-How to get rid of bad thoughts and symptoms of a “weak
personality” that prevent you from succeeding in life and
getting a good job;
 7-How to prevent the vibrations of a bad thought from
deteriorating or “killing” the vibrations of good thoughts, etc…
 And something else you should remember, you are not the
slave of the genetic creation of the Anunnaki who created all of
us.”

Note: Ulema Sorenstein is a modern American Ulema, originally


from Latvia. He lived in Lower Manhattan area in New York City,
and he is 135 year old. You look at him, and you don’t give him more
than 37.
Many people have seen him in different places, simultaneously. We
will comment later on what he meant by:
a-“Responsible for their own bad luck and failure”,
b- “Araya/Conduit”;
c- “Brain zones”.
But first, let’s listen to his Anunnaki-Ulema Kira’at on success and
failure in life, and in business.

*** *** ***

II. Excerpts from Ulema Sorenstein’s Kira’at, as provided


by Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette
(As is, and unedited):

 Many of you came to me and asked me why some people are


luckier than others?
 Or why Elizabeth is making more money than Patricia?
 Or why this person is more successful than another person,
knowing well that he is a spiritual and a good man, and also
very intelligent, while the other person is less spiritual and not
so bright?
 Does intelligence or morality has anything to do with success
in life, and/or the way our brain was wired by the Anunnaki, at
the time they created us?
 My answer to you is this: Intelligence is very important but
does not always guarantee success in life. Many great inventors
died penniless.
 Morality is very important in life, but many spiritual people
were murdered because of their moral principles.
 Morality and intelligence have nothing to do with your
success in life (Your life on this Earth.)
 The high standard of morality and intelligence of a person
does not change luck, decrease or increase your luck and
success in your life.
 I guess, you are concerned with social success, financial
success, or something like that. Well, let’s talk about your
financial success and success in your career.
 I will take an example from your modern city, from your
modern life, from your modern society where you live, so you
will understand me perfectly.
 In 1989, Melissa, Peggy, and Esther graduated from NYU
with a doctorate degree in education. They have identical
credentials, and three of them are of the same age. They are
healthy, and intelligent, and want to succeed in life.
 Usually, when you are not an entrepreneur, you look for a job.
Melissa, Peggy, and Esther are not entrepreneurs. Their
greatest asset is their academic advanced degree. Very good.
 In the modern world of science, education, technology, and
knowledge, education is extremely important, and a degree
should help a lot.
 A few years later, let’s say 1999 for example, you learned that
Melissa became the Secretary of Education; Peggy is a high
school teacher in San Diego; and Esther is working as a
telemarketer in Brooklyn.
 Now, we start to wonder, how come Melissa got a very
prestigious and a high profile job in Washington, while Peggy
and Esther did not?
 After all, if credentials are required, all of them have the same
qualifications and same credentials. So what is going on here?
 Why Peggy is working as a school teacher, and not as a
superintendent or director of the school in San Diego, or as an
education commissioner?
 And why Esther is working as a telemarketer getting $10 or
$15 an hour?
 What did happen to these three highly educated and lovely
ladies?
 Image makers, public relations advisors, headhunters, human
resources directors, and even psychologists will avalanche you
with all sorts of reasons, ranging from personality, contact,
luck, political or social affiliations, ambition, job search
strategies, networking, location, and even because the way a
resume was written.
 All these reasons and explanations have some merits. But
they do not explain why Esther could not get a better job, or at
least a better pay, taking into consideration the doctorate
degree she has earned. After all, such a high academic degree
requires a sound and developed mind, knowledge,
determination, perseverance, and analytical approach to things
in life. All these qualities should have served and helped Esther
in finding a better job.
 Well, the Ulema have a different explanation.
 Although, the Ulema recognize the validity, practicality, and
importance of the explanations given by those experts in the
field, the Ulema believe that what you call “Luck”, success and
prosperity are already fashioned, and written on the front page
of the book of your life.
 What was already decided upon vis-à-vis your success in life
can be found (And sometime changed and totally transformed
by your own will) in the Araya Zones of your brain. A brain that
was genetically created by the Anunnaki. And I am going to
explain to you what I mean by Araya, brain’s zone, Conduit’s
activation, and your genetic brain.
 Now, you have to remember that everything in the world
emits vibrations.
 And all sorts of vibrations occupy a place in the world.
 Some vibrations are detectable, some are not.
 Some vibrations, modern science recognizes, detects, and
registers, and some are not yet known to science and mental
health empiric efforts.
 The same thing is happening right now in your brain.
 The word “world” means everything that surrounds you,
including distant planets, galaxies and extra-dimensions.
 The “world” also means the infinitesimal zones in the Araya
which is in your brain.
 The Araya is the domain, the realm, the landscape where 73
different zones of your brain are found.
 Each zone of the Araya functions differently, because it was
created, engineered and programmed differently by the
Anunnaki, at the time the prototypes and final “models” of the
human race were created.
 And yes, the $10 per hour Esther is getting as a telemarketer
in Brooklyn has a lot to do with the Araya, and one region of
her Araya.
 I am getting there. Be very patient with me. If you are not
patient and you rush to a speedy answer, you will miss the boat,
and you will become very confused.
 At the end of the Kira’at, everything will become clear to you.
 Now, let’s go back to the vibrations.
 Every thought, each idea you have in your brain, has a
vibration. And each vibration occupies a spot in your Araya,
called “Jaba”.
 Let’s simply things and call Araya now a net.
 This net has many holes, called “Jabas”.
 Each Jaba (A hole, so to speak) stores one idea.
 And each idea or thought in the Jaba of the net produces a
vibration.
 For example, if the net has 70,000 Jabas, your brain will be
able to store 70,000 ideas and thoughts.
 This means, that your Araya hosts 70,000 vibrations. And
that is full capacity.
 Some people who are more creative than you could have
300,000 ideas and thoughts stored in 300,000 Jabas (Holes or
locations) in your Araya (Net).
 The good thoughts and good ideas in your Araya do not
expand. They stay well balanced and well synchronized where
they are (Inside the Jaba of the net).
 There, they are safe and protected.
 Only bad thoughts, and bad ideas, such as fear, low self-
esteem, stubbornness, hate, indecisiveness, laziness, tendency
toward violence, badmouthing people, envy, jealousy, betrayal,
so on, emit vibrations that overflow the perimeter
(Circumference) of the Jaba (Hole or location) that stores your
thought or idea.
 This phenomenon (Overflow) takes over the adjacent Jaba(s)
containing a good idea or a good thought.
 Because the negative energy inside your mind is usually
stronger than the positive energy of a good thought, the Jaba on
the net (Location) containing a good thought or a good idea
shrinks, gets contaminated, and stops to emit positive and
creative energy.
 This, kills the good thoughts and good ideas in your Araya.
 If this continues, all good and creative ideas and thoughts in
your brain will be damaged and neutralized by your bad
thoughts and ideas. In other words, many cells in your brain’s
or Araya’s, and their creative mental faculties stored in the Jaba
become dysfunctional; atrophied or dead.
 In this case, you are responsible for causing this
deterioration. Nobody has forced you to think about bad
thoughts or bad ideas. It is your own doing.
 You might say, I have no control over all this.
 Things happen. Ideas come and go.
 And I will tell you, you are wrong, because you can control
your ideas and your thoughts, and make them work for you in a
very healthy, positive and productive way.
 I will explain to you how you can do that very shortly.
 The most destructive thoughts that prevent you from
succeeding in life are:
 a-Low self-esteem;
 b-Fear (Fear of anything);
 c-Unwillingness to accept new ideas;
 d-Bitterness;
 e-Constantly contradicting others because you have
developed a complex of inferiority, and not because of a
complex of superiority;
 f-Negativity.

Note: a to f are not categorically part of the Anunnaki’s primordial


(Original) makeup of the genetic creation of your mind. Your
upbringing, way or life, and personal vision of the world and your
immediate environment could have caused this.

 Let’s go back to Esther’ situation, and see whether the


Anunnaki are responsible for a lack of a great success in her
life, considering the very advanced academic degree she
earned, or whether Esther’s own actions, thoughts,
personality, or her bad “luck” prevented her from getting a
better job.
 And above all, let’s see what the Ulema recommend.
 In life, we have to simplify things to understand them. So,
let’s approach Esther’s situation in a very simple manner.
 It is more likely that a, b, d, and f, have created the
unpleasant condition of Esther.
 The symptoms a, b, d, and f, emanate negative and
destructive vibrations in the Araya, causing the Jaba(s) to
shrink.
 And when the Jaba(s) shrink, the human being ceased to
become creative and resourceful.
 The vibrations of a, b, d, and f overflow the Jaba. And you
already know what happens when the overflow occurs and
invades other Jabas.
 The lack of creative thinking and resourcefulness blended
with negativity and low self-esteem will prevent any person
from getting the kind of job or occupation, she/he deserved.
 And this is exactly what happened to Esther.
 In the Jaba(s), the Anunnaki have installed and implanted
sequences of ideas, thoughts and faculties that shape the
future and the “human cosmography” of all humans.
 The symptoms a, b, d, and f, were never the primordial
ingredients of the Araya or the Jaba.
 This is very good, because it shows that the human race is
not enslaved by the genetic makeup/design of the human
race, by the Anunnaki.
 Many writers, and conspiracy theories advocates in the
Western hemisphere, and particularly in the United States,
so erroneously have claimed that the Anunnaki are
controlling the world; the Anunnaki are our masters; the
human race is enslaved by the Anunnaki; the governments of
the world are controlled by the Anunnaki. This is untrue.
 But what is true is that the brain as designed by the
Anunnaki cannot escape or go beyond the genetic
specifications of the Anunnaki.
 However, the Anunnaki have no absolute control over our
brain, (Araya, and Jabas), since they have allowed us to
activate the “Conduit” in our brain.
 And since all of us have more than one “single brain”,
wonderful things can be accomplished, and our freedom will
always be protected.
 The Ulema believe that the human brain is in fact a
“Supersymetric Brain”.
 And I will explain this to you.
 Because once you fully understand how your
“Supersymetric Brain” functions, you will be able to make
miracles, and heal yourself from many things.
 But you should never ever claim, that the Anunnaki-
Ulema’s healing and therapy methods do replace or
substitute for any traditional, and scientific means and
methods of treatment, and diagnosis, as applied in
traditional medicine, and/or in other legitimate mental
health practices.
*** *** ***

III. The “Supersymetric Mind”: “Ma bira-rach”


Excerpts from Ulema Sorenstein’s Kira’at, as is, and
unedited.

_________________________

a. A brief note on supersymetry:

According to the theory of supersymetry, also known as SUSY, all


particles in the known universe have their counter-part, also called
super-partner(s).
Basically, this is the view of quantum physics scientists and theorists.
In the Anunnaki-Ulema context, supersymetry is either the similar or
the opposite of YOU.
In a limited sense, it is the other super-partner of “you”, and what
constitutes you at all levels; organically, bio-organically, chemically,
genetically, etherically, atomically, mentally and physically.
The most important and predominant part of your mind-body
supersymetry is your mind. Because everything starts in your mind.
In this context, your mind is a “Supersymetric Mind”.

b. What is a “Supersymetric Mind”?

 You were brought up to believe that every person in the world


has a brain; one single brain.
 Nobody seems to contradict this. And I do not contradict this
either.
 However, this “single brain” is not the only brain you have, at
least in this dimension.
 All of us, enlightened or not have two brains; the first brain is
the one we are aware of, and familiar with, from studying
anatomy, medicine and other disciplines, and the other mind, is
the one that co-existed, and currently co-exists side-by-side
your brain, and outside your body.
 It is called the supersymetric mind. In Ana’kh, it is called “Ma
bira-rach”.
 For now, let’s compare Ma bira-rach to your “Double”.
 As you already know, the Double means the etheric image of
your physical body.
 Ma bira-rach is the etheric image of your brains. But we call it
supersymetric, because the particles constituting the physical
and etheric mind can de detected and scanned scientifically.
 In the Western hemisphere, and particularly in the United
States, the theory of supersymetry has received a warm
welcome in the scientific community.
 Scanning the physical brain has become a scientific reality.
But scanning the etheric brain has never been done in the West.
 The Anunnaki-Ulema (Mounawariin) know how to scan both
the physical and etheric substance of your brains. And I have to
remind you here, that you should never ever attempt to scan
your mind or others’ mind using any means or methods that
constitute and illegal medical practice. Leave it to physicians,
medical technicians, and those who are authorized by the law to
do so.
 Two methods have been used by the Anunnaki-Ulema. To
scan the brains (Mind). One is purely scientific; the other is
metascientific, which is totally incomprehensible and
unrealistic to Western scientists.
 The Anunnaki-Ulema’s scientific method consists of
implanting on the “surface of the tissues” of your brains mobile
microscopic devices that move around and scan the Jaba(s) of
you brains.
 The devices detect tumors, deterioration of the cells, and
repair the damaged cells.
 In the United States, some have compared these devices to
the very small metallic objects, an extraterrestrial race (Greys)
has implanted inside the bodies of abductees. This is totally
incorrect.
 According to some legitimate physicians (involved with some
sort of ufology in the United States,) who have treated those
abductees, these devices are of an “alien substance and origin”.
The main function of these alien devices is to monitor the
abductees, and to serve as “receiver-emitter” of aliens’
messages.
 I will not comment on their claims.
 But one thing I will tell you for sure: The Anunnaki-Ulema
implants are not tracking devices. Because once, the cell
damages are repaired, the implants disintegrate, lose their
mass, and the human body flushed them out, the normal way.
 The Anunnaki-Ulema scientific mind (Brains) scanning
occurs in that manner. The scanning is a physical and a real
operation.
 This idea might seem strange and absurd to many scientists
in the West.
 However, we have learned that many military scientists,
psychiatrists, and surgeons, in the West are exploring these
techniques.
 My prediction is that in the very near future, the United
States of America will be using these devices implants
techniques in hospitals and medical facilities.
 As to the second Anunnaki-Ulema etheric mind scanning
techniques, well, these techniques are taught to our students,
and do not require a surgical operation.
 You can scan the mind, and bring comfort to your mind and
your body by either activating the Conduit or superposing the
Araya (Net of the mind) of your physical mind and the Araya of
your supersymetric mind (Your other mind that exists as a bulk
of separate particles in an etheric substance.)
 Using this second technique, you will be able to neutralize the
vibrations of the cells storing bad thoughts and bad ideas, such
as bitterness, negativity, lack of energy, laziness, indecisiveness,
and fear.
 This second technique is called “Ma bi-idawa”.
 I will explain Ma bi idawa in my next Kira’at.

Notes:
 1-Ma bi idawa is outlined and explained in book 4 of this
series “The Anunnaki Ulema Final Warning: Humanity destiny,
UFOs threat, and the extraterrestrials final solution”, and in
book 6 “Anunnaki Self Healing.”
 2-The Anunnaki-Ulema scientific mind (Brains) scanning via
devices implants in the human body is not science fiction
literature.
Allegedly, surgeons and psychiatrists who worked on the CIA Mind
Control Program in the fifties, sixties, and early seventies have
attempted to develop and implement quasi-similar techniques on
volunteers, and retarded patients.
 3-Most recently, a vast literature and avalanches of scientific
papers on this subject appear in the American scientific
community, and many physicians, scientists, and futurists
advanced mind-boggling theories on these implants techniques,
on a theoretical level.

Nevertheless, what was theory in the past is nowadays a pragmatic


application and standard procedures in many scientific fields.
Dean Takahashi stated that “Nanorobotics (Known also as the
Nanotechnology Robots) is a hypothetical concept.
Basic nanomachines are already in use. Nanobots will be the next
generation of nanomachines.
Advanced nanobots will be able to sense and adapt to environmental
stimuli such as heat, light, sounds, surface textures, and chemicals;
perform complex calculations; move, communicate, and work
together; conduct molecular assembly; and, to some extent, repair or
even replicate themselves.
Nanotechnology is the science and application of creating objects on
a level smaller than 100 nanometers. The extreme concept of
nanotechnology is the "bottom up" creation of virtually any material
or object by assembling one atom at a time.
Although nanotech processes occur at the scale of nanometers, the
materials and objects that result from these processes can be much
larger.
Large-scale results happen when nanotechnology involves massive
parallelism in which many simultaneous and synergistic nanoscale
processes combine to produce a large-scale result.”

*** *** ***

49. The Duplicate Image or Reproduction of a


Being “Ishra”

I. Definition
II. Ulema Mordechai ben Zvi explains

___________________

I. Definition:
Ishra is the name or term for the new image or duplicate of the
original existence of a life-form, in another universe.

II. Ulema Mordechai ben Zvi explains:


Anunnaki-Ulema Modechai ben Zvi said:
“All living forms, including humans and animals have many
duplicates of themselves throughout the universe.
In each dimension, physical and non-physical, we find identical,
symmetrical and alive copy of all of us.
This copy is not a visual reproduction or a holographic projection,
but real in every single detail. This could be explained by the fact that
multiple universes are “so created”.
And this creation which goes on ad infinitum encompasses anything
and everything that exists and/or has exited anywhere. Each time, a
new universe is created, whether it is prallel or in another dimension,
the creation process includes every single molecule that has created a
previous universe, or has been a part of it.”

*** *** ***

50. Apparition of Dead Pets. Communication


with our Dead Pets “Gensi-uzuru”

I. Introduction
II. Is it possible to communicate with our dead pets?
III. When your departed loved pet returns to see you
IV. Excerpts from Master Li’s Kira’at on Gensi-uzuru

___________________

I. Introduction:
The Ulema are very fond of animals. Extensive passages in the Book
of Rama-Dosh speak about the important role animals play in the
life of humans, especially at emotional and therapeutic levels. The
Ulema believe that pets understand very well their human-friends
(Instead of using the word “owners”). And also, pets communicate
with those who show them love and affection. This loving
relationship between pets and their human-friends does not end
when pets die.

II. Is it possible to communicate with our dead pets?


Although the Anunnaki-Ulema do not believe in any possibility of
contacting deceased people or animals, they have explained to us
that contacting our departed ones is possible for a very short time,
and only during the 40 days period following their death.
In other words, we can contact our deceased parents and dear ones,
or more accurately enter in contact with them if:

 a-They contact us short after their death;


 b-They must initiate the contact;
 c-This should happen during a 40 days period following their
departure;
 d-Their contact (Physical or non-physical) must be noticed by
us. This means that we should and must pay an extra attention
to “something” quite irregular or unusual happening around
us. Because our departed pets will try to send us messages, and
in many instances, they do.
 e-We must expect their messages, and strongly believe in
those messages.

The Ulema said that humans cannot contact their dead pets. But pets
can contact us via different ways, that we can sense if we have
developed a strong bond with them. Pets know who love them and
those who don’t, because pets feel, understand, sense and see our
aura. All our feelings and thoughts are imprinted in our aura, and
the aura is easily visible to pets, particularly, cats, dogs, parrots,
lionesses, pigs, and horses.
This belief is shared by authors, people of science and therapists in
the West, despite major difference between Westerners and Ulema
in defining the nature and limits of pets-humans after death contact.

For instance, in the United States, pets lovers and several groups of
therapists and psychics think that “a pet can reappear as a ghost, and
a ghost could be luminous or even appear as it did in life. You don't
necessarily know when you see an animal if it's a ghost or not, said
Warren, a researcher in the field. “It's much easier to identify a loved
one who's passed and come back.”
“Don't forget them because they're gone,” said Jungles, who owns
three cats. “Keep their toys and blankets around.

They (ghosts) will go where they're happiest.” Warren agrees.


“Recreate an environment conducive to the pet's life,” he said. “Use
your imagination and treat it like it's alive. In other words, you
should create or re-create conditions ideal for their re-appearance,
even though, for a very short moment.

III. When your departed loved pet returns to see you:


I remember very vividly what the loving and Honorable Ulema Li has
said to a novice who rushed to him in tears, and begged him to bring
back to life, his dog who had died that morning.
This happened some sixty years ago. Here is the story.
My loving teacher asked the little Murad (Name of the novice):
When did your dog die?
Murad: This morning Master, please bring him back to me!
Master Li: I can’t do that son, but how about if I let you see him one
more time?
Murad: Oh Master, I will do anything for you, anything.
Master Li: You know son, you dog is not dead. He is somewhere else
now and he is very happy.
Murad: Master, I buried him this morning under the tree. He is
dead, he is dead!
Master Li: Ok then, l will let you see him one more time, but do not
touch him, do you understand? Just look at him, you can talk to him,
but do not touch him. If you touch him, Poof, he will disappear.
Note: By then, many students were alerted to what was going on and
rushed to sit on the floor at the feet of the Master, excited and
curious, they kept looking at the Master and I could hear them saying
Master, please one more miracle, because they were accustomed to
see the Master doing extraordinary things. An indescribable deep
silence threw its heavy coat over the little students… and we were
waiting…
And all of a sudden, Murad screamed: Ahhhh…he is scratching my
legs…he is licking my right foot…he is here…I feel him…Where is
Master? Where is he, please tell me…I want to see him.
None of the students –including myself– saw or felt anything. Only
Murad. Then, a thin layer of white dust began to take shape. And
suddenly the dust was transformed into a substance like fluffy white
cotton, and finally the face of a small dog began to appear, and
seconds later, his whole body became visible to all of us. Murad got
so excited and so happy…and not remembering what the Master has
told him, rushed to hug his dog. And this was a grave mistake.
Because as soon as he touched the face of his dog, the dog vanished
in thin air. What Murad did upset everybody, and we hated him for
that!
Obviously Murad is in state of shock now. He did not know what to
do or what to say. He dropped on the ground, and almost fell in a
coma. The dog never returned again.

With an austere serenity, the Master was watching everything, and


everybody. Then, almost in a perfect synchronization, the students
shouted: Master! What happened? And very calmly, the Master said:
“You never touch the body of the dead before he rises to a higher
dimension.” None of us understood what he meant. We kept on
asking more and more questions, but the Master in a firm voice said:
“The Dirasa did not start yet!” (Dirasa means the lesson or the
study.)
Two months later, the Master nicely surprised us with a lesson on
Gensi-uzuru. Obviously, he did not forget how interested we were in
learning more about what has happened to Murad’s dog. Everybody
was excited beyond belief. And this is what the Master had to say:

IV. Excerpts from Master Li’s Kira’at on Gensi-


uzuru:

 The Anunnaki love their pets very much. They treat them with
love and respect. They do not consider them animals, but
friends who just look different.
 You too, all of you, should love and care for you pets.
 Your pets feel with you, and know if you love them or you
don’t.
 Your pets can even protect your health and some other time, I
will tell you more about it.
 When your pets die, they don’t forget you. Like all of us, they
remember their good friends.
 And believe me when I tell you, they will try to come back,
because they want so much to be with you again. Unfortunately,
this is not possible.
 However, and because of the great love you had for your pets,
they will keep on trying and trying.
 Pets are like humans…after they die, they don’t understand
what is happening to them. They become very confused.
 But this happens to your pets during two weeks only. The two
weeks after they have died. After these two weeks, their essence
is no longer trapped in the thin sphere separating Earth (More
exactly, previous life) from the next dimension. So after two
weeks, they are gone for good.
 For humans, it is 40 days. After 40 days, we are no longer
here. We enter the next dimension, and we never come back.
 So, during these two weeks (Two weeks after they die), your
pets can return to see you for a very very short moment. It
could last up to 4 seconds.
 Now, it is up to you to feel their presence. It is not difficult if
you pay attention.
 I am going to explain to you.
 First, what they do is this: Because they are no longer in a
physical substance,(Physical form), and because they don’t
know what is happening them, they approach you very slowly.
They are confused, but they recognize you.
 They still remember where they were before.
 They remember your home, you, and the toys they played
with; the ones you gave them.
 So, they come toward you slowly slowly, and gently will lean
against your legs, or touch your legs like a whisper, like a child’s
caress.
 Unfortunately, very very very few people notice that. And
sadly enough, your pets’ desperate efforts to contact you and let
you know that they here around you are almost never felt.
 So, they dissipate, because they run out of energy.
 Remember, they can’t last for more than 4 seconds.
 But they don’t give up. They will try one more time. Only one
more time. After that, they are gone for ever.
 Now listen to me carefully. While you are not aware of their
invisible existence around you, things are still happening, and
you can be part of it.
 You can still make some small arrangements, and mentally
and emotionally prepare yourself to feel them when they
return. And you will succeed. So what you have to do is this:
 Go fetch their toys. All of them if possible. Put them in their
favorite area, where they used to play with their toys or
preferred to lay down.
 Sit on the floor around the toys. Remember, you can’t call
your dead pets. You can’t communicate with them. But they will
communicate with you and will return to see you for the last
time.
 Bring their food and water bowls, and put them next to their
toys, as if they were still alive. Don’t ask why, just do it.
 Stay there for sometime. Twenty minutes should suffice. You
can leave the room, but it is imperative that every ten minutes
you go back, and sit there for few more minutes.
 Keep on doing this for two days. Is it time consuming? Not
really, if you want to see your pets again.
 And before you know it, they will come back, and they will rub
against you, and you are going to feel it, and you will never ever
forget that feeling.
 This would be their farewell to you…
*** *** ***

51. Levels of the Mind


“Iama”

I. Definition and introduction


II. “All humans have more than one brain”

________________

I. Definition and introduction:


A term referring to the concept of the different “Levels of the Mind”.
According to many authors and thinkers, the human brain is a depot
of all knowledge we have acquired so far.
This is not totally correct, according to the Book of Ramadosh.
Ulema Oppenheimer said verbatim, as is and unedited: “The physical
brain, or in other words, the brain of a human being living here on
Earth is one of the multiple layers of an infinite series of knowledge
and experience acquired by a person in and outside the barrier of
time and space.

Meaning that every single human being, regardless of the level of his
or her intelligence and social status has an infinite number of other
brains “Minds” fully operational in different and multiple spheres,
times and spaces.
And this includes the landscape of our Solar System, and other
universes’ systems. This is the cause and effect of the creation of the
Universe and Man.

II. “All humans have more than one brain”:


Man cannot be separated from the universe, because he is a vital and
primordial part of its molecules. In other words, a person can be very
intelligent and extremely important in this life, and in the same time,
he can be a total ignorant and unimportant in other life that co-exists
simultaneously somewhere else in the universe.” He added “here on
Earth you might be an amateur musician, and in other world you are
a conductor of symphonic orchestra, or even equal to Mozart.
In each dimension, and this includes stars and planets, you as a
human being you live a separate life, and you have a totally
independent brain.
Some Masters are fully capable of synchronizing both, and even
more…”

*** *** ***

52. Interpretation of Messages Sent to the


Conduit “Haridu”, “Haridu-ilmu”

I. Definition
II. Ulema Rabbi Mordechai explains Haridu–Conduit Equation

________________

I. Definition:
Interpretation of messages sent to the “Conduit” in an Anunnaki’s or
a human’s brain cell. Also, it applies to missing or misinterpreting a
message by the Conduit.

II. Mordechai explains Haridu–Conduit Equation:


Ulema Mordechai said verbatim:
 “First of all, you have to remember that your mind (Your
brain) has nothing to do with your Conduit. Even though, your
brain is functioning wonderfully and you are doing great things
in your life, not all the cells in your brain have been used.
 There are so many regions in our brain that have not been
explored yet by science.
 In those many unexplored regions of the brain, are so many
cells yet to be discovered, located and localized. And above all,
we need to learn how they function.
 In that mysterious undiscovered region of the brain, the
Conduit exists. It could be in the right or left side of your brain,
or just adjacent to line dividing the two parts.
 In the Conduit, there are so many cells, each one with a very
defined and particular extraordinary faculty/power, that needs
to be activated.
 For instance, one cell triggers the faculty of reading others’
thoughts, another cell (Or cells) is responsible for the faculty of
teleportation, so on.
 If those cells are not activated, you will not be able to do all
those wonderful things.
 So, you have to consider the Conduit as a bank where so many
cells are deposited.
 And there are hundreds of thousands of cells deposited in the
Conduit.
 Each cell has a precise function and an invisible location.
 This means that the Conduit can do so many things, if cells
are activated. It would be impossible in one lifespan to develop
and activate all the cells.
 Three or four fully activated cells is more than enough. With
four activated cells you can do four great miracles by earth’s
standards.
 But for the cell to produce this extraordinary power, the cell
must be able first to understand what you want to do.
 For instance, you cannot tell or command your cell “go ahead
and make me fly or let me learn a new language in one hour.”
 You should first learn how to send your command to your
cell. There is a technique for this.
 Your Ulema teacher knows how to put you on the right track.
 Let’s assume you have sent a message (A thought, a wish) to
your cell. What’s next? Well, the message enters your Conduit.
Your conduit acting as a supervisor, and as the main receiver
reads your message and directs your message to the
appropriate cell.
 Your Conduit knows which cell is activated and designed to
comply with your request.
 Instantly, the cell receives the Conduit transfer (Meaning
your message.)
 Then what? The cell reads your message.
 If your message was sent correctly, then the cell will accept it
and give it a code. So, if in the future you ask again your
Conduit to do the same thing you have asked in the past, the
cell will execute your request in a fraction of a second.
 In other words, each request is coded, and stored in your cell.
 Only coded messages are stored in your Conduit.
 How would you know if you have or have not sent a message
correctly to your Conduit? You will know right away. It is very
simple. If you have not been trained, you wouldn’t know where
and how to start in the first place.
 This is the reason why your Conduit did not catch your
message(s).
 You asked “Does this mean that my Conduit is not receiving
clear messages from me? And the answer is yes! Your Conduit
received something, a thought, a feeling, a wish, a request, call
it whatever you want, but your message was not clear to your
Conduit, because you did not send your message according to
the rules.
 What are these rules?
 They are explained below. But continue to read this first.
 And then you asked: “And how can I send clear messages my
Conduit can catch and understand?
 You have to use the “Transmission of Mind” technique.
Practice this technique before you send messages to your
Conduit. For example, in the past, the SOS (Morse Code) was
used by ships, planes, military troops and others. The person
who has sent the message (Morse) knew the Code; he/she knew
how to tap it.
 Each word had a code…one dot, two dots, three dots, one
dash, two dashes, three dashes, one dit, two dits, one space, two
spaces, three spaces, etc.
 There is a sequence of pulses and marks. And the person who
received the message knew how what these dots, and dashes
meant.
 This is how and why he/she was able to read the message or
decipher it, if it was a secret message.
 Your Conduit works exactly in the same way.
 Your Ulema teacher will tell you exactly what dots and
sequences to use.
 If your Conduit is hundred percent awake, meaning open
(After training completion), the Conduit will immediately
interpret and translate and understand your dots, dashes and
sequences.
 Consider those dashes and dots a “Password”, a logging-in
information, a key to open the contact with your Conduit, just
like the password you use to open your computer or have access
to some websites.
 In the Book of Ramadosh, you will find several passages
referring to the brain waves and mind frequencies, and
some techniques used to direct thoughts and mind energies.
 Your Conduit has its own mode. As long as your Conduit is
not activated, it remains free of your control. Once your
Conduit is activated, you become the stimulus and the manager
of your Conduit.
 The Conduit works partially when it is not activated.
 And partially means reacting by not acting.
 The Conduit functions all the time regardless of your state of
awareness, enlightenment or readiness. But it will not give you
data and information.
 Everything the Conduit finds or retrieves is always instantly
deposited/stored in its compound.
 You will not find what’s in there, until the Conduit is fully
activated.
 Consider it for now as a depot of knowledge; a sort of a
personal bank account where your daily balance is constantly
increasing, however, you are not allowed to have access to your
bank account.
 So, nothing is lost.
 Your Conduit collects and stores information all the time, and
from various sources, times, and spheres.

*** *** ***

53. Plasmic Halo Surrounding the Physical


Body
“Hatani”

I. Definition
II. The concept
III. The Hatani “Protection Shield”
IV. Hatani and Khuch “Kush-Ra”: Protection against physical
threats and harms

__________________

I. Definition:
Usually referred to a plasmic halo surrounding the physical body of
an Anunnaki-Ulema. From Hatani, derived the Akkadian verb
Hatanu, which means to shelter. Hatani is closely related to the
Anunnaki-Ulema Baridu technique.
Baridu is the Anunnaki-Ulema term for the act of zooming into an
astral body or a Double.

II. The concept:


 The initiated and enlightened ones can zoom into their other
bodies, and acquire Anunnaki supernatural faculties.
 I have used the words supernatural faculties instead of
supernatural powers, because the enlightened and initiated
ones are peaceful, and do not use aggressive physical power, or
brutal force to achieve their goals.
 The use of violence against humans and animals, even
aggressive thoughts and harmful intentions annihilate all
chances to acquire Anunnaki’s extraordinary faculties.
 Your Double can easily read your thoughts.
 If your thoughts are malicious, your Double will prevent you
from zooming yourself into its ethereal molecules.
 Therefore, you have to control your temper, remain calm, and
show serenity in your thoughts, intentions and actions.
 You Double is delicate, even though it can accomplish the
toughest missions and penetrate the thickest barriers.
 Any indication of violence or ill intention triggers a pulse that
blocks your passage to the ethereal sphere of your Double.
 Once you enter your Double, you will be able to use it in so
many beautiful and effective ways as:
1- A protective shield against danger,
2- An effective apparatus to protect yourself in hostile and
dangerous situations,
3- A tool to develop your abilities to learn many languages,
and enhance your artistic creativity,
4- A stimulus to increase the capacity of your memory,
5- Instrument to heal wounds and internal injuries. No, you
will not become a surgeon, but you will be able to stop
internal bleeding, and eliminate pain,
6- A vehicle to visit distant places and even enter restricted
areas for good causes. The possibilities are endless.

Once you are in a perfect harmony with your Double, and your
physical organism is elevated to a higher vibrational level through
your union with your Double, you will be able to walk through solid
substances such as walls, sheets of glasses and metal.
You become effective in controlling metal and de-fragmenting
molecules of any substance. This will allow you to transmute, change
and alter the properties of any object known to mankind. But if you
use these supernatural faculties to hurt others, or for personal and
selfish gain, you will loose them for good, and you will be
accountable for such malicious use in the other dimension. And this
could delay your entrance through the Ba’ab.

III. The Hatani “Protection Shield”:


Excerpts from Ulema Kira’at; Ulema Govinda said about the
protection against threats and dangers (Verbatim):
 Only those who have learned and developed esoteric Ulema
techniques can use their Double as a shield.
 However, a novice or a sincere student who is searching for
the ultimate paranormal truth, and who has revealed a high
standard of spirituality and goodness will be able to use the
Double, once he/she has completed the Ulema studies.
 At a novice stage, the Double is alive and well, and is fully
aware of your existence, but as a novice, you are not aware of its
existence, because you have not established a rapport with your
Double.
 Once, a rapport has been established with your Double, your
Conduit will throw an invisible protective shield around you.
 But was is a shield? Is it a physical barrage? A protective tool
or a device similar to the fibreglass or a metal shield police use
in riots?
 The answer is no.
 The shield functions in so many different ways your brain
cannot comprehend. However, I will try to explain to you one of
the protective measures a shield uses in threatening situations.
 The Ulema after years of study and practice, and following the
instructions of the Book of Rama-Dosh, became capable of
creating a sphere (Or zone) around them that resembles a halo.
 Some call this halo a “Bubble”.
 The halo surrounds their physical body.
 In the halo, exist molecules and particles charged with high
atomic and sub-atomic density (No, not nuclear devices!), i.e.
energy.
 This energy is denser in its composition than any of the
molecules and particles that physically create and constitute
any physical action or movement against an Ulema’s body.
 Ulema’s energy changes constantly and transmutes itself into
higher or lower molecules and particles density, according to
their surroundings and needs.
 Because of the Ulema’s denser atomic substance, nothing can
penetrate the halo surrounding them.
 You have to remember, that everything in the universe is
composed from molecules and particles.
 For instance, if you throw a punch at an Ulema, you put in
your punch a certain amount of energy and physical effort. The
energy and the physical effort are composed from molecules.
 These molecules are denser in their composition than the
molecules floating around the Ulema, and thus cannot
penetrate their halo and reach their bodies.
 This is why people can’t go through walls. Our bodies
molecules need “to shrink” and “transmute” themselves into
thinner vibrations, to allow us to go through walls.
 The non-physical entity (Double) you have mentioned is not
totally non-physical.
 It changes. It materializes and dematerializes.
 The Double can project itself as a physical entity. And it takes
on multiple appearances ranging from holographic to multi-
dimensional presences.
 However, the materialistic apparition does not last very long
in a three-dimensional sphere, because its bio-etco-plasma
energy is consumed rapidly.
 a-Your Double is extremely intelligent and alert, and it senses
things around you. Things currently happening and those en
route.
 b-Your Double knows right away if what is coming at you is
safe or dangerous.
 c-If the Double detects a threatening situation, it sends an
alert to your Conduit.
 d-Your Conduit receives the message from your Double.
(Note: Sometimes, it is simultaneously, and/or your Open
Conduit understands the situation on its own, without the help
of your Double.)
 e-Your Conduit acts on its own and guides you instantly to a
safer position. Call it whatever you want, instinct, an inner
feeling, etc…it does not matter what you call it.
 f-At the same time, your Conduit emits vibes aimed at the
source of the threat to bock it.
 g-At this very moment, your Open Conduit and your Double
act in unison.
 h-In a fraction of a second, the attacker or the negative vibes
aimed at you is diverted. Nothing can penetrate the halo
around you. If you practice and master the Baridu technique,
you will be able to block any threat.”

*** *** ***


IV. Protection against physical threats and harms
“Hatani and Khuch, Kush-Ra”

Note: The following is taken from a Q&A during a Master’s Kira’at.


Part of the text overlaps with a text mentioned above.
This was intentional, because we do not recall precisely when and
how the Q&A and the Master’s Kira’at occurred in the remote past.
We tried to reconstruct the events to the best of our ability, so please
excuse us for this unavoidable repetition.

Khuch “Kush-Ra” is a term for the energy that animates the “Double”
of a human being. From Khuch, derived the Kabalistic and Hebrew
term Khuch-ha-guf “Kuch-ha-guf”, which means the astral body of a
man. According to the Ulema, the Double’s energy serves also as a
protection shield against all sorts of threats and dangers.
During an Ulema Kira’at, a student asked the Ulema: “Regarding the
Baridu technique… you said that “Once you enter your Double, you
will be able to use it in so many beautiful and effective ways as a
protective shield against danger, and an effective apparatus to
protect yourself in hostile and dangerous situations.
My questions is:
How a non-physical entity that does not live on Earth can protect me
from physical threats?
If this is true, then the President of the United States and the
Secretary of State should get rid of their bodyguards and hire a
Double? It does not make sense!”
The Ulema replied verbatim:
“Protection against threats and dangers: First of all, you have to
remember that people of power, politicians, et al, are neither
spiritual people, nor adepts of metaphysical studies.
They spend more time campaigning, shaking hands, and giving
speeches than developing spiritual and paranormal abilities.
So bodyguards remain a necessity. They should stay around.

Only those who have learned and developed esoteric Ulema


techniques can use their Double as a shield. However, a novice or a
sincere student who is searching for the ultimate paranormal truth,
and who has revealed a high standard of spirituality and goodness
will be able to use the Double, once he/she has completed the Ulema
studies.
At your stage, your Double is alive and well, and is fully aware of
your existence, but YOU are not aware of its existence, because either
you do not believe in a Double, or you have not established a rapport
with your Double.
Once, a rapport has been established with your Double, your Conduit
will throw an invisible protective shield around you. But was is a
shield?
Is it a physical barrage?
A protective tool or a device similar to the fibreglass or a metal shield
police use in riots?
The answer is no. The shield functions in so many different ways
your brain cannot comprehend. However, I will try to explain to you
one of the protective measures a shield uses in threatening
situations.

The Ulema after years of study and practice, and following the
instructions of the Book of Rama-Dosh, became capable of creating a
sphere (Or zone) around them that resembles a halo. Some call this
halo a “Bubble”.
The halo surrounds their physical body.
In the halo, exist molecules and particles charged with high atomic
and sub-atomic density (No, not nuclear devices!), i.e. energy. This
energy is denser in its composition than any of the molecules and
particles that physically create and constitute any physical action or
movement against an Ulema’s body.
Ulema’s energy changes constantly and transmutes itself into higher
or lower molecules/particles density, according to their surroundings
and needs.
Because of the Ulema’s denser atomic substance, nothing can
penetrate the halo surrounding them. You have to remember, that
everything in the universe is composed from molecules and particles.
For instance, if you throw a punch at an Ulema, you put in your
punch a certain amount of energy and physical effort. The energy
and the physical effort are composed from molecules. These
molecules are denser in their composition than the molecules
floating around the Ulema, and thus cannot penetrate their halo and
reach their bodies.

*** *** ***

54. Shape-shifting
“Ibra-Anu”

I. Definition and introduction


II. Anunnaki’s shape-shifting

___________________

I. Definition and introduction:


For extraterrestrials, shape-shifting is necessary.
Ambar Anati said verbatim (As is a nd unedited): “Shape-shifting
includes skin color change, organs size, general physical
appearances, but not the functionality of the body.
The Anunnaki can easily shape-shift themselves.
This is necessary for climatic and atmospheric reasons.
Each planet has its own climate, temperature and atmosphere.
Consequently the body must adapt to these environment conditions.

II. Anunnaki’s shape-shifting:


When they visit Earth, the Anunnaki slightly change their physical
appearances, not so much, because in general, they look like us,
except their eyes are much bigger, and their height is far more
superior and taller to the size and height of humans. Some Anunnaki
are 9 foot tall. Even their women are extremely tall by human
standard.
Some women are 8 foot tall. When they travel to other planets, minor
changes are required.
For instance, when they get out of their galaxy and visit the planets
Niftar, Marshan-Haloum and Ibra-Anu, they change the color of
their skin, and the shape of their hands.

On Niftar (Niftari), inhabitants have grey-blue color skin and 3


fingers in each hand. The fingers are long, thin and beneath the skin,
there are millions of microscopic hair filaments and pores (orifices)
that help them hold on slippery surfaces like glass and wet areas.
Anunnaki look very different from the Zetas and the numerous alien
races that have visited the earth. In this context, they never appear or
manifest like reptilians or short “Greys”. It is easy to recognize an
Anunnaki, because he usually appears like a tall warrior; his vest is
made out of thin layers of metal called “Handar”.

He wears a long robe “Arbiya” of dark colors and underneath, it a


sort of pans with wide contour. On his wrist, you always notice a
navigation tool. Many of the extraterrestrial races wear tight outfits,
almost glued to their skin. Anunnaki don’t. The “Greys” are
notorious for shape-shifting. They can appear like a reptile, an insect
and even like humans. The Anunnaki can transmute and manipulate
their bodies if needed.
This happens very rarely. And in many instances, they don’t need to
do so, because they are already known by so many galactic and outer-
galactic civilizations, and seen by inhabitants of millions and
millions of stars, planets and moons. They are superstars in their
own rights.
Aliens of lower dimensions need to manipulate their bodiy-type to
enter the atmosphere of other planets, particularly underwater and a
multitude of underground environments and habitats.
This is exactly what happens all the time with the “Greys” who live on
earth and work with scientists in restricted areas such as
underground genetic labs, and military research centers and bases.
One of their striking characteristics is claustrophobia.

*** *** ***

Bringing Youth to Your Face


“Hatori-shabah”

I. Definition
II. Ulema Suleiman Al Bak’r explains the concept

________________

I. Definition:
It refers to various phases of youth brought to a person via the
practice of the Anunnaki-Ulema Daemat-Afnah technique.
It is closely related to Daemat-Afnah, which is a term for longevity,
and halting the process of aging.

It is composed of two words:


a-Daemat, which means longevity.
b-Afnah, which means many things, including health, fecundity, and
longevity.
According to the Anunnaki-Ulema, we are not programmed to age.
By practicing the Daemat-Afnah, a person will regain his/her youth,
and his/her face will look 37 year old.
II. Ulema Suleiman Al Bak’r explains the concept:
On the subject, Ulema Suleiman Al Bak’r said (Verbatim):

 “You have to practice the technique for at least one full year.
You will not see any improvement or any result before 12
months. I will explain to you what is going to happen step by
step.
 For the first 6 months. You will not notice any change on your
face.
 At the end of the seventh month, you will begin to feel that
some of your facial muscles are getting stronger. A strange and
a new sensation you have never felt before in your whole life.
 Your face will look cleaner and firmer.
 Some of the wrinkles under your eyes will disappear. In rare
instances, they would not.
 Not all the wrinkles will disappear if you stop practicing.
 At the end of 12 months, you will notice that you eyes have
gained vitality. They will look sharper.
 Your eyes will glitter with a sign of good health.
 At the end of 12 months, you will notice that your face’s skin
is healthier, and almost 90% of your wrinkles (large and small)
have diminished.
 The dermatologic results have no side effect.
 A certain incomprehensible inner strength will energize your
whole body.
 After 13 months of practice, the face you had when you were
37 starts to reappear gradually. You will not believe what you
are seeing.
 This change is usually accompanied by sizeable increase in
physical dynamism and mental vitality.
 Your face is younger, almost 100%.
 Only your face gets younger, not your neck, body or any other
part of your body.
 Your grey hair will stay grey.
 If you are bold, you will stay bold.”
 You will keep your new face for a very very long time, as long
as you keep a good diet, and you eat well.

*** *** ***


56. The Ability of Observing Entities
Fluctuation
“Idartari”


I. Definition
II. Pets and children ability to see non-physical entities

__________________

I. Definition:
A term for the act of observing “Entities Fluctuation”.
Anunnaki Ulema Al Baker explained (As is and unedited):
“Fluctuation is a signal that something or some living form is around
you, but with your limited physical senses and faculties, you are
unable to see it in its real appearance.

II. Pets and children ability to see non-physical entities:


Pets like cats and dogs can see non-physical entities.
But this is not limited only to animals. Children when they are little
can also sense and see these entities, and in fact, they do enjoy
watching these entities and conversing with them. Parents should
not discourage or punish their children when they tell them stories
about ghosts and “unseen friends”.

We can learn a lot from pets and children, just by watching how they
react in the presence of these entities, and by taking notes.
At the beginning, this would not make any sense to many of us, but
we take notes, if we are patient, and we start to compare these notes
following several events, our mind will open up, and a part of our
“Conduit” will be activated. These entities are not the product of the
imagination of a child.

They do exist in multiple etheric and even plasmic form.


But our eyes, more precisely our brain is unable to perceive them.
Unfortunately, children lose this wonderful faculty as they grow up.
Animals don’t.”
And he added, “It is so beneficial to have pets at home. The time will
come and you will realize that a presence of a pet in your home is in
fact a blessing.”

*** *** ***

57. Extraterrestrials in the Book of Ramadosh


“Ezakarfalki”,
“E-zakar-falki”

I. Definition and introduction


II. Evolution of the extraterrestrials and the human races
III. Extraterrestrial races populated the Earth
IV. Extraterrestrials of the sea (Underwater)
V. Senses of the extraterrestrials
VI. Talking to extraterrestrials
________________________

I. Definition and introduction:


Term for extraterrestrials as mentioned in the Book of Rama-Dosh.
Per contra, inhabitants of planet Earth are called Ezakarerdi or
Ezakar.Ki.
In terrestrial vocabulary, extraterrestrial(s) is a term applied to any
entity(ies), object(s), substance(s), life-form(s), intelligence, and
presence that have originated from beyond planet Earth. Grosso
modo, referred to as alien(s).
Contemporary ufology etymology added extraterrestrial origins
coming from outer-space, other planets, stars, galaxies, and
dimensions.
The word extraterrestrial is composed from three words:
 a-Extra, which is derived from the Latin word Extra, which
means outside; additional; beyond.
 b-Terrestri, derived from the Latin Terrestris, which means
pertaining to earth; belonging to earth; earthly; made out of
earth, itself derived from the Latin words Terranum and
Terrenum, which are derived from the word Terra, which
means earth; ground; piece of land; soil.
(Note: From the Latin word Terrenum, derived the French word
Terrain; and from the French word derived the English word
terrain.)

c-Al, an English addition.


Note: The Latin word Terra originally derived from the Arabic word
“Tourab” (Terrab), which means dirt; dust; earth, itself derived from
the Arabic word Tourba (Terrba), which means a piece of land,
originally derived from the Ana’kh word Turbah, pronounced
Toorbaah, which means dirt from planet Earth.

In the Sumerian/Akkadian epics and mythologies, the words dirt and


earth refer to clay; the very clay found in abundance in ancient Iraq
that was used by the Anunnaki to genetically create the human race.

II. Evolution of the extraterrestrials and the human races:


Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette said, the evolution of aliens, and the
extraterrestrial races on many galaxies evolved inter-dimensionally
by copying, duplicating, and cloning themselves and fertilizing their
own genes.
On other planets, more advanced extraterrestrial civilizations
multiply and prosper through the development of brain’s waves and
thoughts frequencies.

They did not need to immigrate to other planets in order to survive,


and/or to recreate (Reshape) themselves, as mistakenly claimed by
some ufologists, extraterrestrialogists, mediums, and channelers, for
they did not encounter insurmountable ecological or bio-organic
catastrophes on their own planets or stars.

Zetas and Anunnaki did alter their genetics but, not for survival
purposes or for intra-planetary travel-immigration readiness
reasons. The alteration came as cause and effect, much needed to
reach a higher level of awareness and scientific advancement.

III. Extraterrestrial races populated the Earth:


Some 300,000 years before the creation of the cities of “The Women
of Lights,” forty-six different races of humans and quasi-humans
populated the earth.
The greatest numbers were found in Africa, Madagascar, Indonesia,
Brazil, and Australia. These quasi-human races died out not because
of famine, ecological catastrophes, or acts of war, but because of the
disintegration of the very molecules and composition of their cells.
The Anunnaki created the ‘final form’ of human beings, and all of us
are their descendants.

IV. Extraterrestrials of the sea (Underwater):


According to Sinhar Ambar Anati, the extraterrestrials of the sea are
not our ancestors and creators, the Anunnaki. They belong to a
different race; one of the 46 different alien races that have visited the
earth at its dawn.Only 7 specific races remained on Earth. They have
many things in common, and share non-physical similarities, but are
different from the Anunnaki.

According to ufology literature, the aliens who currently work with


terrestrial scientists have extraterrestrial physiognomy, totally alien
to the human race. The original Anunnaki no longer live on earth.
They left our planet thousands of years ago. However, many of their
off springs, bloodlines, descendants and hybrid remnants live among
us, today.
Ulema Sadqi said: “The Anunnaki are not very much different from
the human beings. They are not reptilians at all, and they don’t look
like the Zeta Reticulians, as erroneously depicted in the West. They
have a human shape, yet they are capable to shape shifting when
needed.”

V. Senses of the extraterrestrials:


Anunnaki-Ulema Wah Lin stated that the extraterrestrials have an
astonishing range of senses; for instance:
 a-The Artyrians have 13 different kinds of senses, ranging
from physio-biological to mental-sensorial, yet, they are neither
psychosomatic nor neurological.
 b-The Naryans have 17 senses.
 c-The Anunnaki have 26 extra-senses and a multitude of
meta-bio-organic faculties.”

Ulema Li adds: “Some of the most fascinating senses are:


 a-The ability of freeing themselves from the limitation of time
and space and sensing the “ultra dimension”; in other words,
they are able to feel and sense the infinitesimal frequencies that
constitute the dividing waves or walls between each dimension
and/or multiple universes. Those dividing lines are waves and
they expand and react spatially like rubber bands. There are no
other words or expressions in the human vocabularies we can
use to describe these “existences”.

 b-They can totally eliminate the effect of heat and cold and
mentally regulate the temperature degrees of the environment
in any sphere. Also they can adjust others bodies’ temperature
for health and therapeutic reasons because they can sense the
body’s weaknesses and strengths.
In terrestrial terms, they can see the aura. But it goes beyond aura,
because aura is produced bio-organically and can be detected either
visually or through scientific apparatus.

VI. Talking to extraterrestrials:


Anunnaki and extraterrestrials have no intention whatsoever in
engaging into a dialogue with ordinary human beings. If they have an
agenda, and/or are on a mission, they either abduct (Not the
Anunnaki) humans, or directly contact scientists working with them
in secret facilities, laboratories and bases.

Anunnaki do not talk tête-à-tête with humans, nor convey their


messages on a personal basis. And most certainly, Anunnaki do not
abduct humans. However, direct and personal contact did happen
with aliens. They were the “Greys”.
But this occurrence is extremely rare. Ulema Al Bakri said: “ And
when and if it happens, extraterrestrials would not pronounce one
word and walk away, or stutter as some contactees reported”,
including one famous contactee in Switzerland who made headlines
worldwide and became the messenger of the Lyrans on earth. When
aliens contact (So to speak) or encounter a human being, they
usually complete sentences and engage into a dialogue, even though,
the dialogue is short, and their words are incomprehensible, and the
voice is mechanic and fuzzy.

In some instances, the aliens transmit their messages mentally, not


telepathically, because for the telepathic phenomenon to occur, you
need two telepathic people, and most certainly contactees who are
regular folks are neither gifted nor trained telepaths. You cannot talk
to another person on your cellular phone, if the other party does not
have one.
Do you want to try? Same thing applies to telepathy; it needs two
telepathic stations, fully operational and fully capable of sending and
receiving messages.
The human brain did not yet reach this level. Although some
preliminary forms of telepathy between humans were noticed in rare
instances. Extraterrestrials are capable of speaking and
understanding many languages, including our own.
They assimilate and “compute” words, sentences and physical
expressions with mathematical formulas and numerical values.
Some extraterrestrials have limited vocal chords capabilities, but
they can very quickly acquire additional vocal faculties, and earth
dialects by rewinding sounds and vibes.

Contrary to what many contactees and others claim or depict,


extraterrestrials from higher dimensions do not talk like
computerized machines.
They have their own language but also they can absorb and
assimilate all the languages on earth in a blink of an eye via the
reception and emission of a spatial memory.

*** *** ***

58. The First stage of the Afterlife “Hattari”


I. Definition
II. Description
__________________

I. Definition:
The first stage of the afterlife during the 40 day period following
death. In that stage, a new life-form develops in the mind of
deceased people.

II. Description:
Note from A. Doudnikova:
A brief description of Hattari was given by a lady (Who apparently
was an Ulema) to her beloved son. Here is an excerpt from the
“Forbidden Book of Ramadosh”, based on the original work of
Maximillien de Lafayette:
The scene is between Germain Lumiere, an Ulema from France who
has just lost his mother. It appeared later on, that his mother was an
Ulema too, but she has never told him that, for reasons we don’t
know.
Two days after she passed away in Paris, his mother appeared to him
during her funeral, as she has promised him.
The young Ulema asked his mother lots of question about the after-
life, and what is she doing there. Herewith, a brief excerpt from their
conversation:

Location: Cemetery of Père-Lachaise, Paris, France.


Time: In the afternoon, during the funeral of Countess….mother of
Germain.
Personages:
1-The deceased mother appears as a spirit and talks to her son
Germain, while her physical body is in the coffin.
2-Germain in tears talking to his dead mother for the last time.
3-Sylvie: She is Germain’s sister.

Excerpt below: Germain is telling us what they talked about at the


funeral.
“I returned to Mama, who was looking sadly at Sylvie. It’s really
too bad I can’t talk to her,” Mama said to me, “but some day, of
course, she will know, like everyone else. Ah, well, let’s go to the
more secluded areas. We don’t want people to think you are talking
to yourself.”
We wandered around the cemetery. Père Lachaise, is one of the
most beautiful cemeteries in the world, full of trees, impressive
statues, and old tombstones. Shady lanes provided privacy, and we
could talk freely.
“So tell me about your experience in the Afterlife, Mama,” I said.
“I have not been there very long, you know, but time and space play a
different role there, and also, my training allows me to know what it
is really like and what will happen next,” said Mama. “You will also
know, when the time comes.”
“Doesn’t everyone know?”
“No, many of the dead don’t realize that they are dead. They
don’t seem to see the border between life and afterlife. These people
can be very anxious.
They sometimes try to get back to Earth, meet their loved ones, and
they are very upset when the living cannot see them.”
“So what happens to them?”
“The guides, spirits of higher dimensions, help them realize
that they are dead. Sometimes, if persons have a real need to go back
to Earth to accomplish something, the guides are saddened by their
pain, and allow them to go back, manifest, and complete their task.
Once they do that, they can come back, much happier and calmer. It
only happens once, of course, but after that they are ready to adjust
to the afterlife.”
“What is it like, over there? Were you scared when you
passed on?”
“There is nothing frightening about the afterlife,” said Mama.
“It is very much like earth, but peaceful, much more beautiful, and
there is no strife or violence of any kind. To the departed, who have
shed their bodies and are occupying a new body, it is as physical as
the earth is to the living.
Everyone is healthy, there is no disease, no pain, no violence. There
are cities with streets and buildings, gardens and parks, countryside
– all seems normal, like a poetic interpretation of life. What you see
here is visual projections.
You see millions of real people, coming and going in huge
waves. There is much to do, since the place you come to first is no
more than a quick stop. You only stay here for twenty to thirty days,
some times forty days, and then move on.”
“Do they know where they are going?”
“It depends. Most people cannot see what is ahead of them,
only what is behind them. But they always move on to a higher
phase.”
“So naturally they are a bit scared of the unknown.”
“Yes, some of them experience anxiety. That is what the twenty
to thirty days period is for, deciding what needs and things to be
done. And they are helped by the guides, or by people who chose to
stay longer in this place.”
“So you can stay there longer?”
“Yes, there are various options, of course. One option is to go to
the place you have created when you built your “Minzar” and
planned a place of rest and happiness.
Many people choose to go there for a while – it is up to them how
long they would stay there. Time is not really a very important issue
where we are. It seems to me that time has stopped. You can stay
there forever if you like it very much.”
“The place created with the Minzar must be very appealing to
most people, I should say,” I said. “It’s custom made for your own
happiness.”
“Yes, and the person already has friends, a place to stay,
things to do, anything he or she likes best. It’s a good option. But
eventually, I would say one should try to evolve into the higher
dimensions. You don’t know what you miss unless you see it.”
“When I built the Minzar, Rabbi Mordechai told me that I
could not stay in the place I created for too long, since the energy
would dissipate and the living body will call me back. But I suppose
it’s different when one is dead.”
“Yes, since this is now part of the depot of knowledge located
in your brain, which was created by the Minzar experience. It is your
Spatial Memory, my son.”
“So you plan to move on after the thirty days?”
“Yes. It is as it should be, and I want to evolve into the higher
dimensions. But as I promised, I will come back for you and be your
guide when it is your time to follow me. Think about it as a short,
though necessary separation, but temporary all the same. What it all
comes down to, Germain, is that there is no death. And the afterlife
offers so many opportunities for new growth, new knowledge. There
is nothing to fear.”
“Will you see Papa? Will I see him when I go there?”
“Of course we will. Do not worry and do not mourn me,
Germain.”
“I will try not to, Mama. I promise.”
“Well, my son, I will be leaving now. No need to say goodbye.
Rather, au revoir.”

I closed my eyes, not wishing to see her leave, and felt


something brush my cheek as if she kissed me. When I opened my
eyes, there was no sign of her. She was gone. I went home and helped
Sylvie attend to the visitors; I have never felt so numb.”

*** *** ***

59. The Fourth Dimension


“Chabkaradi”

I. Definition
II. Explanation

____________________

I. Definition:
Name of the Fourth sphere on the cosmic net.
Herewith an excerpt of the definition, meaning and dimensions of
Chabkaradi, from Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette’s Kira’at:
Translated verbatim from the Ulemite and Ana’kh languages, word
for word (Unedited).

II. Explanation:
 1-The 4th dimension is where the mind navigates freely.
 2-Your physical body cannot enter the 4th dimension.
 3-However, the righteous Ulema can physically enter the 4th
dimension for a very short time.
 4-Short time means less than 40 days.
 5-Any living Ulema who stays for more than 40 days in the
4th dimension will disintegrate, and will never be able to return
to earth again.
 6-In the 4th dimension, there is a real reflection of everything
that exists on earth.
 7-A real reflection means an identical presence in substance
and properties of all physical things on earth. But they exist at a
different vibrational level.
 8-A vibrational level is what constitutes the substance of any
object or matter in the universe, including thoughts, intentions,
and events that did not happen yet.
 9-The vibrations on earth can be detected, but not all of them.
 10-The mind vibrations and waves frequencies can be
detected on earth. But the vibrations that have created the
mind in the first place are undetectable by humans.
 11-If for some unknown reasons, you were able to enter the
th
4 dimension, and if you were not guided by a higher presence
such as supreme entities, highly advanced non–terrestrial
beings, etc., your body will be exposed to tremendous physical
and non-physical pressures.
This could cause loss of memory and blindness. It did happen,
and we are mentioning it here for additional learning, but it is
not useful to elaborate further on this situation.
 12-Now, if you were brought to the 4th dimension by non-
terrestrial benevolent beings, your journey will be very pleasant
and enlightening. This could happen in two ways, and only two
ways:
 a-Via a galactic multi-dimensional Markabah. This spaceship
does not travel or traverse distances and dimensions. It
“jumps” from one time pocket to another time pocket on the
map of the universe. In front of the spaceship, time and space
as two separate dimensions cease to exist. They cancel each
other.
This allows the spaceship to reach higher spheres at an
incredible speed way beyond the comprehension of human
beings. Behind the spaceship, time and space open and close up
as soon as the spaceship exits from the time-space tunnel that
allowed the spaceship to reach the 4th dimension, or the
parallel one.
 b-Via Tay Al Ard technique or the projection of mind. Only
Ulema and the enlightened ones who learned these techniques
from non-terrestrial beings can do that.
 13-The 4th dimension is incomprehensible, because it has a
semi start-line, but not a finish-line.
 14-Beyond the 4th dimension exists the 5th dimension which
is the realm of the purified entities. No physical substances
exist in the 5th dimension, only their codes.
 15-Yet, in the 4th dimension, many physical forms retain their
physical properties.
 16-Humans will spend many many years in the 4th dimension
before they reach a higher one.
 17-Many humans (Minds or Souls) could get lost around the
perimeter of the 4th dimension.
 18-Humans who just arrive in spirit or in mind to the 4th
dimension have two choices and decisions to make within 40
days:
 a-To stay in the 4th dimension and evolve or
 b-To return to earth.
 19-Those who decide to stay in the 4th dimension will be
taken to an area similar to the Anunnaki’s Miraya Hall.
 20-They will receive orientation and guidance from supreme
beings who come to visit and lecture from much higher
dimensions.
 21-Those who began to progress and evolve spiritually in the
4th dimension will be acknowledged. Their spiritual progress
will elevate their mental vibrations, thus allowing them to see
loved ones, and to enjoy the company of delightful higher
beings.
 22-It could take a person thousands of years (in terrestrial
term) to evolve. But time does not exist in higher dimensions,
not even the perception of time.
 23-Some evolve rapidly and elevate themselves to the 5th
dimension, the sphere of absolute beauty and happiness.
 24-Almost all human beings reach the 5th dimension, except
those who caused so much damage, pains and sufferings to
others. No, they will not burn in fire. There is no hell in the
world beyond, but the mental-spiritual pain is as atrocious as
the physical pain…

*** *** ***

60. State of the Human Mind After Death


“Zrah-Amru”

I. Definition
II. The Ulema explain
____________________

I. Definition:
A term referring to the status of the mind in the afterlife vis-à-vis
one’s previous commitment on Earth. This situation is explained in a
Q&A of one of the Ulema’s Kira’ats (Readings and lectures).

II. The Ulema explain:


A student asked the Ulema:
Question: If Bashar (Humans) can reach immortality and live for
ever in the other world where they reunite with their loved ones,
what would be the position, reaction and obligations of a widow who
married other men after the death of her first husband, when she
meets them afterlife in other dimension?
The honorable Ulema’s answer:
 Since we do believe that life continues after death, multiple
marriages could cause a state of mental confusion, and perhaps
embarrassment for the deceased widow who remarried after
the death of the departed spouse…this could happen upon
meeting multiple husbands or wives in the early stage in the
Fourth dimension.
 But once the Mind is purified, and as we progress mentally
and spiritually, we begin to see and understand the situation
very differently…
 In higher dimensions, such as the afterlife, the Mind
functions, sees and understands things very very differently
from the way we were accustomed to on earth.
 The deceased continues to live after death as a Mind.
 The Mind retains terrestrial memory, even though the Mind
has lost all sensorial properties.
 The Mind cannot alter the past. We are stuck with the
memory of everything we have done on earth. Only the
Anunnaki who created us genetically can alter the past of the
person they have created. And by altering the past, the
Anunnaki can erase all kinds of memories, including related
events that occurred in one particular dimension.
 This is applicable only when a person has been created on
earth by an Anna.Ki (Anunnaki). I said on earth, because there
are so many different beings who were created by other
creators governing other planets, stars and dimensions.
 It is a very unique story with human beings and animals who
live on earth. On our planet, we multiply through “Mouda-
Ja’ah” (Intercourse).
 On other planets, reproduction is done through different
processes and methods; no physical contacts or sexual acts are
necessary.
 Thus, there are no physical attachments, no corporal desire,
and no sense of being physically possessed by another person,
or committed to a physical partner.
 The collective mind of the community on some other planets
substitutes for sexual desires, lust for the flesh, and corporal
pleasures.
 Because humans can reach immortality in other dimensions
starting in the Fifth dimension, freeing ourselves from physical
memories is essential; this is done in the Fourth dimension.
 Once the purification is complete, and as soon as the process
of freeing ourselves from past corporal memories is done, the
Mind readjusts itself accordingly.
 This means, that almost everything we loved or treasured on
earth, such as wealth, owning a luxurious car, properties, nice
wardrobe, sexual pleasures, etc., become meaningless and
shallow.
 This is why, we, the human beings…we are the lowest form of
living entities in the universe, and our habitat “Ard” (Planet
Earth) is lowest form of habitat in the universe. This decadence
is caused by greed, violence, egoism, betrayal, and sexual
bondage.
 Now, we go back to the deceased who is meeting the multiple
spouses he/she had after the death of the first partner in life.
 The deceased will not feel embarrassed at all, because the
Mind in the afterlife, once it has been purified, begins to
understand that physical attachment causes sorrow and grief.
And because there are no more sexual desires in the afterlife,
these desires lose their meaning and importance.
 Consequently, the position of the deceased widow who is now
pure Mind changes completely. Multiple spouses are no longer
looked upon as multiple spouses, because they have acquired
different nature and composition, and the association of the
Mind with their physical properties on earth is integrated into
the collective mind of the community.
 Thus, all of them will continue to live, think, and interact with
each other as a continuous sequence of the chain of immortality
free of physical attachment.
*** *** ***

61. Anunnaki’s Device for Reading and


Deciphering Codes and Symbols
“Hazi-minzar”,
“Mnaizar”

I. Definition
II. Description
III. The text

_____________________

I. Definition:
A small but sophisticated device used by the Ulema of the 8th degree
to read and decipher codes and symbols from the Book of Ramadosh.
It is composed of two words:
 a-Hazi, which means to read; to decipher a code.
 b-Minzar, which means an observation tool.
The word Mnaizar” is a diminutive of Minzar, referring to a smaller
Minzar.

II. Description:
Ulema Mordechai gaves us a rare description of Hazi-minzar.
His description appeared for the first time in the West in a book
authored by Maximillien de Lafayette.

Here is an excerpt from his book:


The scene: Ulema Cheik Al Huseini talking to Germain Lumiere, a
young Ulema, who is visiting the Cheik by invitation of Dr. Farid
Tayara, a noted Ulema and head of a Masonic Lodge.
The place: Baalbeck, Lebanon, in the house of the Cheik.
The year: Around 1957-1958.

III. The text:


Germain Lumiere telling the story in his own words:
“Slowly, thoughtfully, I went to Dr. Farid’s office, musing on all that
has happened to me in the last few days; it was hard to digest. I was
going to get instructions as to when and where I would be given the
honor of reading The Book of Rama Dosh. Another miracle will
manifest in my life.

Dr. Farid informed me that the arrangements have been made, and
that the next day he would pick me up very early in the morning. We
were to drive to Baalbeck, to see Cheik Al Huseini, my host during
my previous trip to Baalbeck. It was there that I saw the startling
printing of The Book of Rama Dosh, in the underground city. It
would be nice to see him again. Dr. Farid added that Ulema
Ghandahar, an expert on The Book of Rama Dosh, would join us at
the Cheik’s house.

The Cheik, as hospitable and pleasant as ever, was delighted to see


me, and hugged me enthusiastically in the friendly and warm Arab
fashion. “I knew you had the making of a great Ulema in you,
Germain!” he said, holding me at arm’s length and looking at my face
with great affection. “You were such an attentive youth, and so
fearless during our meeting with the Afrit, we were impressed!”
“I wish I had known you were impressed at the time,” I said,
laughing. “I felt like such a fool, and Taj made fun of me.”
“Ah, that is just Taj,” he said indulgently. “Such a silly man, like a big
baby... But we all love him anyway. And he is doing very well now,
with all the gold he got at the underground city.”
“He was badly beaten for it by the Afrit,” I said.
“You pay the price for everything in this world,” said the Cheik
philosophically. “But in the end, everything is as it should be. As we
Arabs say, Macktoob! It is written… But come in, come in! Ulema
Ghandahar is waiting for us in the library.” My excitement at the
thought of finally reading The Book of Rama Dosh hardly needs to be
described.
We entered the house and went directly to the library. It was a much
smaller room than I expected, and the pretty, carved and glassed
over bookcases seemed to contain scholarly, but ordinary books, the
kind you would find in any scholar’s library.
I was surprised, since I expected a huge collection at Cheik Al
Huseini’s library. Little did I know what was to come…
The Cheik introduced me to Ulema Ghandahar, who shook my hand
and said that he would be so happy to acquaint me with the most
important book in the world.

Cheik Al Huseini went to one of the bookcases and pushed a hidden


button among the carvings on the wood.
The case swerved to the side, and a short secret passage was
revealed. We walked through it to a wooden door, and entered a
library of immense proportions. The ceiling was very high, about
fourteen feet in my estimate, and the room stretched to the
proportions of a hall. Bookcases lined the walls, floor to ceiling, and
more books were stacked on tables.

These books were mostly very old, as you could tell from the leather
and cloth covers. However, not only books were there. Through the
glassed doors on some of the cabinets I saw a huge collection of
ancient rolled-up scrolls.
There was a divan on one side, and a few comfortable chairs, all done
in the sumptuous Arab style. Diffused light came from the partially
covered windows. This was exactly like the library I had imagined
Cheik Al Huseini would have.
Of course, I thought. There are things here that should never be seen
by the non-initiates. He must keep it secret.

Cheik Al Huseini went to one of the bookcases, looking for


something, and without turning his head said, “Please, help
yourselves!” I looked at the table before me, on which three cups of
tea, which were not there a minute ago, suddenly materialized,
accompanied by some pastries.
I smiled and looked at Dr. Farid, pointing silently at the tea cups.
“This is only the beginning,” he said mysteriously. My excitement
mounted, I could not wait to see The Book of Rama Dosh, and I was
wondering if that was what the Cheik was looking for. I sipped my
tea and took a pastry.
It was interesting, I thought, how different the Ulema of the Middle
East were from the Western ones, or the Chinese, even though their
goals, aspirations, and ethics were exactly the same.
For example, Rabbi Mordechai always said, “If you can do something
normally, there is no reason to use the so-called supernatural
powers.”
Master Li was exactly the same.

I was taught the techniques that emphasized the power of mind, not
techniques that had the touch of the magical.
The Middle Eastern Ulema did not think in those terms. They
comfortably used all the magical techniques they wanted, and in
addition, seemed to have contact with non-human entities who lived
with them and worked for them.
I decided that the people of the Middle East loved emulating the
sumptuous style of King Solomon, with his Afrit, gold, talking
animals, flying carpets, and rivers of wine.
The Western Ulema tended to work like scientists, with a tendency
toward austerity and a simple lifestyle. The differences were dictated
by personality and culture, I suppose, because all of them wanted
and achieved the same objectives, only reaching them by different
roads.
The Cheik turned away from the book case, and walked a few feet
toward us. He did not find the book he looked for, I thought, worried
that it was lost and I will not be seeing it after all. A sense of
disappointment went through me, but I noticed that the Cheik was
doing something strange.
He turned toward the bookcase, lifted his arm, and pointed at the
book case. Then he stopped, not moving. A second later, a book came
floating toward him, and hovered in midair. The Cheik sat down and
spoke a few words in a language that I did not know, but from the
way he said it, I deduced that it was a code.
The book floated further toward him, and settled gently on the table.
It was a big, heavy book, with a wood bark cover that had no marking
on it to show what was its title.
The Cheik did not touch it. Instead, he went to a small table on the
side of the divan, and brought a small box made of dark wood, inlaid
with silver and mother of pearl. He put it next to the book.
“Germain, would you please go to the bathroom next door, take a
shower, and put on the white robe that hangs on the door,” the Cheik
said. “We’ll wait for you.”
I did as I was told. While showering, I wondered if the book on the
table was indeed The Book of Rama Dosh. How could it be? It looked
quite different when the Cheik and Master Li printed it with the help
of the Miraya plates and the light. Then, it looked like shining plastic,
very modern, while the book on the library table was a normal, old
book. Later I found out how this worked, so I might as well explain it
right here.

The Book of Rama Dosh exists as only one copy. It is located in


another dimension. Each time an Anunnaki-Ulema needs a copy, it
must be printed directly from this original. Calling it requires special
situations and techniques, such as I have seen in the underground
city, but the advantage is, each copy is an exact facsimile of the
original.

Other ancient books are subject to mistakes in printing, incorrect


interpretation of words, etc., but not The Book of Ramadosh.
If this was the same copy that was printed in my presence, then the
Cheik took the plates, which I remember him to wrap carefully in a
silk scarf, to his own library, and there made sure it is properly
wrapped in wood bark. It would never be wrapped in leather or any
other animal-related substance. Of course, I could not be sure that
this was the same copy, but no matter what, the content was always
identical to the true, the one Book of Rama Dosh.
I put on the white robe, returned to the library and sat at the table
with the other three. Cheik Al Huseini opened the book, so now I
knew that must be The Book of Rama Dosh. I tried to keep calm. This
would be the first time I would see Ana’kh printed in a book! And
who could tell what the book is about?
The Cheik turned the page. It looked old. He turned a few other
pages, each looking newer and smoother than the last. None of the
pages had anything written on it, though. And yet, the three others
seemed to be absorbed in reading the book!
Was I going mad?
I did not want to interrupt them, or ask questions, but I was
beginning to feel desperate. Another page was turned, and it was
again completely blank. I sighed with irritation. The Cheik suddenly
stopped, looked at me and said, “Moo Akhazaa, forgive me, please.”
He laughed gently. “You cannot see the writing without the necessary
machine,” he continued. “We no longer need it, at this stage, and
when you get to stage 18 and over, you won’t need it either, but for
the moment, this machine will help you see the writing.”
He opened the little box that was on the table next to the book, and
took out a sophisticated-looking contraption.
It was obviously meant to be used as eyeglasses, but did not look like
modern ones.
Rather, it was more like a Seventeenth Century Swiss watch, and I
saw wheels attached to it on which certain letters and numbers were
written, some big, some small, in an old and elegant font, looking
like codes.
“What is this?” I asked. “It is going to help your vision,” said Cheik Al
Huseini. “Take a look at how it is constructed.”
There were three layers of lenses for each eye, made of glass or
crystal, completely transparent. A small wheel, made of gold and
edged with green topaz, was attached to each lens, all on one side.
Each wheel had a little knob used for adjusting the codes. You would
lift each lens individually, and adjust the wheel to the required code.
On the other side was a larger wheel, about twice the size of the little
wheels, and it adjusted itself to the position of the small wheels once
they were in the perfect position.
Once the arrangement of the lenses and wheels was complete, the
machine would allow you to see colors we usually do not see on
earth.
Within these colors reside separate dimensions, or perhaps the
colors reside in these dimensions, which is really one and the same.
It is as if a door is opened to a spatial gate, an entrance to these
parallel dimensions. You are on earth, but through your Conduit, you
are entering an unearthly, separate dimension.
Now, put the machine on, and look at the bookcases. Don’t look at
the light from the window. This will allow your retina to adjust, and
will bring up certain visual faculties.”
“What does it do?” I asked, putting the machine on.
“It emulates the natural vision of the Anunnaki, who do not possess a
retina, but a more complex mechanism. Even if you close your eyes,
once you put the machine on, you can still see.”
“What is the name of this machine?” I asked, still looking at the
bookcase, as directed.
“It is called Minaizar, which is a diminutive of Minzar, the ability to
see. The vision through the Minaizar is called Nazra,” said the Cheik.
“I am seeing something strange,” I said. “The bookcase is suddenly
huge, astronomical…”
“But it is still visually very clear, right?” said the Cheik. “Unlike the
usual type of visual enlargement, like a magnifier, which blurs
everything and forces you to step back, the Minaizar retains its sharp
image.”
“This is true,” I said, “But I feel a little dizzy…” I closed my eyes to
refresh them, and was amazed that I could still see, just as the Cheik
said before. I opened my eyes and returned to the table, sat down
and looked at the book through the machine. Geometrical forms and
numerical symbols were printed on the page I looked at. As I was
gazing at them, they opened up, unfolded, and I saw letters coming
through and appear on the page. Everything was written in pure,
original Ana’kh. I could read The Book of Rama Dosh!
Here I must explain a few things about Ana’kh, which would clarify
my reading. Ana’kh is a unique language, and has some
characteristics that no earthly language possesses.
For example, when one wants to translate a page verbally from say,
Latin to English, each person will have slight variations on the text
that they will produce. The same would happen in simultaneous
translation of any living language by a translator in the United
Nations. Even when translating a book on paper the variations will
appear, which is making translation more an art than a science. Not
so with Ana’kh.
If a hundred Ulema will verbally translate a page written in Ana’kh,
they will use the exact same words, in any language they use. The
same goes for written translations. They are not really translating.
They are transmitting, rather, with the help of the Conduit, and no
variations will ever occur.
Another interesting trait is that the phonetics make themselves
clearly “heard” as you read Ana’kh, even if you have never seen or
heard the word you are reading.
The words pronounce themselves for you, and no mistakes are ever
made. The machine, of course, facilitates that, but it is accomplished
by the Conduit. The machine is actually linked directly to the
Conduit.
In any book, you cannot start in the middle of a paragraph or a word
and still know what the page is all about. You must read a certain
amount to grasp the meaning. With Ana’kh, each word presents its
own meaning and message. There is no need for grammatical
sequences.
The words, helped by the machine, follow you, rather than you follow
them. In an ordinary book, you have to go back to certain pages if
you want to retrace something. In Ana’kh, because of this tendency
of the words to follow, you don’t need to go back. Rather, you call the
word to you.

The simplest analogy would be a search engine on a computer. You


type the word on a search engine, and the connected messages
appear. That is what happens with Ana’kh. When you look at a page,
you encounter about three hundred Nokta – meaning spots, or
messages. You look at a certain Nokta, and it opens up to thousands
of other words and meanings.
The content is huge, but not intimidating, since it opens up in what
seems to be multiple screens. Then, you can choose what you are
interested in. I was reading along, finding it very easy to understand
the pure, traditional Ana’kh, and completely comfortable with the
viewing machine, so much so that I no longer noticed wearing it.

I was particularly interested in the creation of humanity, so the book


took me to that moment in time. I kept doing this, moving from one
Nokta to another, until I decided to move to another subject. I was
fascinated by what the book had to offer regarding the dimensions
and limitations of the universe.
I got the precise information I wanted regarding the question of
whether the universe is expanding or shrinking. After that, I
wandered into a Nokta regarding the future of humanity.
One thing led to another, and I was so totally absorbed, that I did not
know if the other three were still with me or not, and certainly did
not know how much time passed.
Finally, after watching millions of years enfold in front of me, I
pulled back with a sigh. I felt the hand of Dr. Farid on my shoulder,
and turned. “Do you know that you have been reading for two days?”
he asked, smiling.
“Two days?” I asked, startled. “I did not eat, or drink, or sleep for two
full days?”
“Yes,” said Dr. Farid. “And you squeezed millions of years into two
days. Time to go.”
I did not feel it. Not a bit of exhaustion or thirst or hunger was
caused by this intense study that lasted two days. On the contrary, I
felt as comfortable and refreshed as if I came back from vacation. I
mentioned that to Dr. Farid on our way back and he said that this
was a common reaction, though some people did feel rather
exhausted. Apparently it was an individual reaction. Still, he advised
me to go to the hotel and rest.”

*** *** ***


62. Entities Created by the Anunnaki, and the
Ulema in Modern Times
“Helama-Gooliim”

I. Definition and introduction


II. Their nature and essence
III. The creation process of these entities

_______________________

I. Definition and introduction:


Name of entities (Human-like) created by Anunnaki-Ulema for the
purpose of performing a good deed. They are part animal, part
human, part Golem, part Ghoul; a hybrid race.
They are made of clay, or earth materials, much like all of us, but
they have certain physical differences from both humans and
animals.
They look exactly like normal people; they have eyes, hands, feet, etc.
“They are not at all like machines or robots. You will not think them
anything but human if you saw them…”said Ulema Mordechai.
They are born full adult. They are sensitive to light, so they work only
by night, but they are nevertheless great engineers. Ulema
Mordechai stated that when the Ulema, and some Kabbalists, reach
the holy level of Kadash Daraja, they can create life. Real life.

II. Their nature and essence:


The creatures would function much like human beings, but they have
three deep fundamental differences:
 1-They don’t have a soul,
 2-They don’t have a physical heart that functions like a blood
pump,
 3-They don’t have a wired brain.
Their essence comes from another dimension, to which they return
after their task is done. They are created for that task, and that is
their only purpose. The creator tells them what to do, and they do it
right away. In my case, I have created four of them to build houses
for poor people in Estonia, and they did it very nicely, overnight.”

III. The creation process of these entities:


Ulema Mordechai said: “I create each of them separately. For each, I
bring with me seven pieces of papers on which I write certain codes,
and I have to have my cane with me. Then I take soil, earth, or clay,
and pour water on it to make it pliable. Once it’s the right
consistency, I mold it into a ball. I turn off most of the lights, leaving
a very low illumination, maybe one candle or a small lamp, and pull
back about four to five feet.

I then read a certain text that would encourage the ball to take the
next step, which is to shape itself into an oblong of about four feet,
and be ready to follow my special design. At that point I take my
cane, walk to the other side of the oblong, dip the cane into the
oblong, and stretch it.
I command the oblong to duplicate a human form, and it becomes a
statue, lifeless, but similar in every way to the human form. I take the
seven pieces of paper, and put two in the eyes, two in the ears, one in
the mouth, and one on the breast, over the heart.
I roll the seventh piece as if it were a homemade cigarette, go to the
other side of the statue, and throw the rolled paper at it. It always
lands either in the nose or between the feet, and either position is
correct.
The statue starts to move and attempts to stand up. At this time I
turn around and leave the room for a few minutes, so as not to look
at the statue as it comes to life. Seeing the actual transformation is
forbidden by the Code of the Ulema, as stated in the Book of Rama
Dosh.
I stand behind the door of the room, and wait until I hear the
creature make a sound, which tells me that the procedure is
complete.
I go back into the room, welcome the creature, give it clothes to wear,
and pull out all the papers, to keep safely until such time as they are
needed to disassemble the creature and send its essence back to its
original dimension.
I create them to do one single task. When the task is accomplished, I
ask them to lie on the floor, next to each other, return the pieces of
paper with the codes to the correct places, and pour water over their
bodies.
The bodies disappear, leaving earth on the floor, and the essence
goes back to where it came from.” Asking the Ulema: “Do they always
go away peacefully?” he replied: “No, sometimes they develop a
personality, if the task is a bit longer, and they have the delusion of
being human and want to stay in our dimension. Of course it would
be cruel and inhuman to let them stay, not to mention dangerous,
but they do become tricky. So the Ulema or Kabbalist must be even
trickier, and hypnotize the creature into deep sleep.
He then put the papers where they belong and set the paper on fire,
and the body starts smouldering. At that time, we pour the water
over them and they disappear…they built for me nice houses…The
next morning, very early, I went to inspect the houses, and removed
the great blanket that covered the area. The blanket is a large plasmic
sheet that can create a shield of invisibility over the entire area. We
just refer to it as a ‘blanket’ because it’s a short and easy name…”

*** *** ***


63. Folding-Unfolding the Earth
“Hiraaba-safri”
_______________

Ulema Cheik Al Kabir explained:


Ulema Cheik Al Kabir explained this phenomenon. His exact words
were: “Time is represented with two lines not perfectly aligned; one
for you, the other for what is not you.

Space is represented with two circles, one for you, the other for what
is not you. If you manage to place yourself between one of the two
lines and one of the two circles without touching the other line and
the other circle, you will conquer time-space.
Most people think, time goes straight from yesterday to tomorrow,
through today, in one line, but they are wrong, and great thinkers
understand the malleability of time and space.
Sufis, Gnostics, pre-Islamic, Islamic, and Jewish scholars, all wrote
about it.

The Jewish Kabbalists, in particular, engaged themselves in the


study of Tay Al Ard, but had a different name for it, in Hebrew. They
called it Kefitzat Haderach, meaning, word by word, ‘the jumping of
the road,’ but translated as the ability to jump instantaneously from
one place to another or travel with unnatural speed.
It was widely documented by them.

*** *** ***

64. Longevity of Quasi-Human-Life Form


“Izra-nafar-mikla’ch”
I. Definition
II. The Anunnaki-Ulema explains

____________________
I. Definition:
A term referring to the longevity of quasi-human-life form, such as
Golem and hybrids. The term is explained in a Q&A from one of the
Anunnaki-Ulema Kira’ats (Reading and lectures).

II. The Anunnaki-Ulema explain:


A student asked: Can hybrids reach immortality through genetic
manipulations?
Answer of the honorable Ulema:
 Although hybrids are intelligent beings, they should not to be
considered neither humans nor extraterrestrials.
 Their essence (DNA) is not pure.
 They are genetically created either by human beings, or by a
malicious extraterrestrial race.
 Any living creature Dha-kiliyan (Genetically) created by
humans will never reach immortality.
 Because a Dha-kiliyi (Genetic) creation of other living-forms
manufactured by human beings is an artificial product, this
Dha-kiliyi (Genetic) product which does not include the first
energy element introduced in regular human beings by the
Anunnaki will totally disintegrate without leaving the “Shou’la”
(Spark of life).
 The Shou’ la was created on earth by the Anunnaki. No
human ever succeeded in duplicating a Shou’la.
 Any living creature Dha-kiliyan (Genetically) created on earth
or in other physical dimensions by a malicious extraterrestrial
race coming from a lower dimension will not reach immortality.

Authors’ note: We do believe that the honorable Ulema was


referring to what American ufologists call the “Greys”, even
though, he has never used the word “Greys”.
It is our belief that this word is an American ufology terminology.
The word he used was “Min Kariji al-dounia”.
Min means from.
Kariji means outside or outer.
Dounia means the world.

 Living entities created by the Greys (A lower intraterrestrial


alien race) are born contaminated.
 The Greys’ contamination prevents these living entities
(Hybrids, half humans-half-extraterrestrials) from ascending to
the Ba’ab.
 Consequently, the hybrids will not enter the other dimensions
and reach immortality.

*** *** ***

65. Immortality After Death


“Izrahi-ghafra”

I. Definition
II. The Anunnaki-Ulema explains

______________________

I. Definition:
A term related to the concept and/or Anunnaki-Ulema’s thoughts on
various states of metamorphosis of the mind-body of a deceased in
the after-life. The concept is herewith explained in a Q&A from one
of the Ulema’s Kira’ats (Readings and lectures).

II. The Anunnaki-Ulema explain:


A student asked the Ulema: Do we become immortal if we follow the
teachings of the Ulema?
Answer of the honorable Ulema:
 On earth, humans cannot reach immortality. Afterlife, the
“Tahirin” (Purified ones) will reach immortality.
 But we have to understand what immortality is?
 Is it an eternal existence?
 What kind of existence? Is it physical or spiritual?
 Mental or organic? Terrestrial or extraterrestrial?
 Nothing in the universe lasts for ever, not even the universe
itself. Despite the fact that the universe is expanding, it will
eventually cease to exist.

Authors’ note: Contemporary leading scientists in the field of cosmology

and quantum physics agree with the honorable Ulema. They have publicly

stated, that soon or later, the universe will cease to exist. Those who

believe in Jesus, Mohammad, Krishna, Vishnu, Jehovah, and Allah don’t.

 It is very important to keep in mind, that so many


extraterrestrial beings came to earth, thousands of years ago.
We are aware of 46 different alien races who have visited planet
earth.
 Some of these alien races created early forms of human
beings. I say forms, because at the time these living creatures
were created by the aliens, they lacked mental faculties. Some
looked like us, but not exactly.
 We know from the manuscripts of Melkart and the “Society of
the Fish” which was established by the early Phoenicians who
lived on the Island of Arwad, that the primitive human beings
were called “Intelligent animals” because they behaved and
lived like animals, but were more intelligent than the beasts of
the earth.
 These beings were created by extraterrestrials who came from
a lower dimension, even though, they were highly advanced.
The extraterrestrials did not install a Conduit in the brain cells
of the primitive beings.
 Without a Conduit, no living creature can ascend to the
Madkhal or Ba’ab. Consequently, a passage to the Fourth
dimension is virtually impossible without a Conduit.
 These primitive creatures did not reach immortality, because
they did not go through the Ba’ab. Because they did not have a
mind, but brain’s membranes, they were unable to continue to
live afterlife.
 In the afterlife, you continue to live only with your mind.
 Your mind is the source of energy that keeps you alive.
 The primitive creatures did not have a mind, although their
brain was wired like an electronic machine. Their brain was not
developed at all, and as a result, their race became extinct.
 They perished, not because of famine, wars, or fall of
asteroids on earth, but because of the deterioration of the cells
of their brains.
 You will not find these primitive creatures on other planets,
or in parallel dimensions.
 Humans who were “Dha-kiliyan” (Genetically) created by the
Anunnaki will eventually reach immortality, as long as the
universe remains in existence.
 The early living-forms of humans, primitive creatures,
intelligent animals, and monstrous robotic human-like species
vanished from the face of the earth some 65,000-61,000 years
ago.
 When the Igigi came to planet earth, some 65,000 years ago,
they captured many of those primitive half human, half animal
creatures who were living in Australia, Madagascar, Brazil,
Indonesia, Central Africa and some regions of Europe, and
transformed them Dha-kiliyan (Genetically) into an upgraded
form of humans. Still, they looked like robotic animals. A few
years later, they died out.
 Some 65,000-60,000 years ago, three extraterrestrial races
Dha-kiliyan (Genetically) created a new human race.
 They were the Lyrans, the Nordics, and the Anunnaki. The
newly created human race had a mind (Not to be confused with
soul), brains’ cells and a dormant Conduit.
 Because a Conduit was installed in their brains, our ancestors
were destined to reach immortality. Today, we are the offspring
and descendants of the intelligent human race created by these
three extraterrestrial races.
 Yes, you can say, the Anunnaki made us immortals.

*** *** ***

66. Columns “charged” with Anunnaki’s


Supernatural Powers
“Jachim”, “Jachin”

Two large cast-bronze pillars in the Temple of Solomon.


Ana’kh/Ulemite/Hebrew. Noun.
Pronounced Ya-chim in Ana’kh.
I. Definition and introduction
III. Ulema’s interpretation

___________________

I. Definition and introduction:


Jachin and Boaz were the names given by the Phoenician builder and
architect Huram “Hiram” to two large cast-bronze pillars that stood
on either side of the entrance to the Temple in Jerusalem, also called
the Temple of Solomon. Huram was also the architect of the Temple.
Jachin and Boaz were immense, impressive in design and
architectural structure; eighteen cubits (about 27 feet) high and
twelve cubits (about 18 feet) around, and were decorated with secret
symbolic Phoenician motifs.

II. Ulema’s interpretation:


Ulemite literature suggests that the Jachin and Boaz were columns
“charged” with Anunnaki’s supernatural powers.
The Two Pillars called “Amid” in Phoenician and Ana’kh (Plural of
Amud, which means a column in Phoenician, Ugaritic, and Arabic)
appear to play a paramount role on the landscape of esoteric
knowledge, as elaborately depicted in the Anunnaki-Ulema
extraterrestrial manuscript, the “Book of Ramadosh”.

Ulema Naphtali ben Yacob said, verbatim, “The two pillars were an
architectural structure in the Temple of Solomon, but the fact that
they were unattached to the floor’s foundation, and stood as a
composition of free-standing columns reveals their esoteric-
metaphysical importance in Ana’kh literature.
The Amid “Two Pillars” have a deep meaning, known only to the
“Illuminated”.

The Amid (Pillars; columns) are a primordial, and an integral part of


the Eluhi Matrix (Divine Grid; Creator’s Plan), which defines the
very structure and nature of the multiple existences of the physical
and non-physical beings, who inhabit our world, and commonly
reffered to, and/or called the Elohim, Nafar, the extraterrestrials,
intraterrestrials, hybrids, and humans

The Two Pillars represent many things, and are traditionally related
to and associated with (To name a few):

 1-Duality of Man;
 2-Molecular copies of mankind;
 3-Trans-Teleportation;
 4-Metal transmutation;
 5-Solomon’s gold mine;
 6-The Knights Templar;
 7-St. John of Malta Order;
 8-Electro-magnetic mind-body Saphra (Entering-Exiting
adjacent non-physical dimension);
 9-Hiram-Solomon Freemasonry Brotherhood;
 10-The Atlantean pillars/gates;
 11-The origin of religions.

*** *** ***

67. Abbreviation of Yahweh


“Jah”, “Yah”

Phoenician/Ana’kh/Ulemite/Hebrew. Noun.
I. Definition
II. In Ana’kh/Ulemite literature

_________________

I. Definition:
Jah “Yah” is an abbreviation of Jehovah.
It is derived from the Ana’kh word Ha-yah, which means life.
In Hebrew, it means, to be, come to pass.
The ultimate name is the Divine Name Jah; the name-title of the
Creator, the chief of the angels (Called Supreme Beings, the Gods,
and/or Extraterrestrial Anunnaki-Nephilim.)

II. In Ana’kh/Ulemite literature:


In Ana’kh/Ulemite literature, Jah also means, the galactic source of
all living beings. In other words, the primordial cosmic life-being in
the whole universe, and its multiple dimensions.
Yah “Jah” is also one of the creators of the Anunnaki.
Ulema Stanbouli said verbatim, “The world is not a divine creation
that happened in six days, as described in the Bible, and the
Scriptures. Our world was created outside the landscape and
perimeter of the physically measurable cosmos.
What we see on Earth, in our skies, heavens, planets, and galaxies,
stars, and far beyond what we can see, originated in another
dimension, and this other dimension also originated from another
one.
Some of the copies of the universe, including ours, our Earth, and
ourselves were created according to non-physical blueprints of many
“Supreme Architects”, who existed in other planes, billions of years,
before God’s name and existence were invented by humans, whether
in their imagination, in caves, in temples, or epics.
These creators were the Jah.” Ulema Stanbouli said verbatim, “The
world is not a divine creation that happened in six days, as described
in the Bible, and the Scriptures. Our world was created outside the
landscape and perimeter of the physically measurable cosmos. What
we see here on planet Earth, in our skies, heavens, planets, galaxies,
stars, and far beyond what we can see or we would see, originated in
another dimension, and this other dimension also originated from
another one.

Some of the copies of the universe, including ours, our Earth, and
ourselves were created according to non-physical blueprints of many
“Supreme Architects”, who existed in other planes, billions of years,
before God’s name and existence were invented by humans, whether
in their imagination, in caves, in temples, or epics.
These creators were the Jah.
Ulema Naphtali said verbatim, “Humans were not created in the
image of God. We were created genetically from Turab, an Earth’s
substance and the DNA of an advanced extraterrestrial race called
Annaki or Al Anna’kh.
And the Annaki were “fashioned” according to Jah’s specific formula.

Parts of this formula are:


 a-Rouhiyya, meaning etheric;
 b-Sham-kiya, meaning cosmic (Cosmic dust and molecules);
and
 c-Birza, which means mental projection…The Jah, plural or
singular, male of female, or non male and non female were the
architects and geneticists of the formula of life, the cosmos, and
time-space concept.”

*** *** ***

68. Anunnaki’s Sex and Reproduction “Jin.Si-


Yah”

I. Introduction
II. Hybrids
III. Major points about the subject

________________

I. Introduction:
Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette said, “In the Anunnaki’s society, sex
and reproduction are two separate functions. Anunnaki reproduction
is done by technology, involving the light passing through the
woman’s body until it reaches her ovaries and fertilizes her eggs.

The eggs go into a tube. The woman is lying on a white table for this
procedure, surrounded by female medical personnel. If performed by
uncaring aliens (such as the grays and the reptilians) it is unpleasant
and even can be painful, which has given rise to the abductee’s
stories of suffering.
However, not all aliens are created equal.
The Anunnaki, which are a very compassionate race, are very gentle
and the procedure is harmless. Apparently, the Anunnaki version of
sex is much more enjoyable for both genders.
It involves an emanation of light from both participants. The light
mingles and the result is a joy that is at the same time physical and
spiritual. The Anunnaki do not have genitals the way we do.

II. Hybrids:
As a hybrid becomes more and more Anunnaki, he/she loses the
sexual organs and becomes physically like the Anunnaki.
The hybrid welcomes the changes and feels that he/she has gained a
lot through the transformation. The Anunnaki mate for life, like
ducks.
They don’t even understand the concept of infidelity, and don’t have
a word for cheating, mistress, extramarital affairs, etc. in their
language.
Like many extraterrestrials, the Anunnaki do not have genital
organs, but a lower level of aliens who inhabit the lowest
interdimensional zone and aliens-hybrids living on earth do. The
stories of the abductees who claim to have had sex with Anunnaki are
to be disregarded. Those stories are pure fiction.

III. Major points about the subject:


 1-Aliens reproduce in laboratories.
 2-Aliens do not practice sex at all.
 3-Aliens fertilize “each other” and keep the molecules (not
eggs or sperms, or mixed liquids from males and females) in
containers at a very specific temperature and following well
defined fertilization reproduction specs.
 4-Alien babies are retrieved from the containers after 6
months.
 5-The following month, the mother begins to assume her duty
as a mother. Alien mothers do not breast-feed their babies,
because they do not have breast, nor do they produce milk to
feed their babies.
 6-Alien babies are nourished by a “light conduit.”
 7-Human sperm or eggs are useless to extraterrestrials of the
higher dimension.
 8-Extraterrestrials are extremely advanced in technology and
medicine. Consequently, they do NOT need any part, organ,
liquid or cell from the human body to create their own babies.
However, there are aliens who live in lower dimensions and
zones who did operate on abductees for other reasons – some
are genetic, others pure experimental.”

69. Short Mental Projection of the Self “Ka”

I. Definition
II. Ka and the Egyptians

__________________

I. Definition:
A short mental projection of the “Self”. In Ana’kh literature, “Self” is
interpreted in numerous ways.

For instance:
 a- Ka is one of the many holographic images of one’s
thoughts. Meaning, that all thoughts, ideas and feelings can
materialize quasi-physically. Ideas and inner feelings have
frequencies and particular colors, visible to the enlightened
ones. Seeing these holographic images is a process that can be
learned and mastered, following an Ulema’s orientation
program.
 b- Ka is the materialized form/shape of one’s original copy,
meaning the primordial substance and/or structure of a
physical body. At first, a person is conceived as a non-physical
substance, a sort of an idea, a creation’s blueprint.
 c- Following various stages, Ka takes definition in a human-
body shape, according to a prescribed design. This design
contains everything that will play major role in one’s life,
encompassing health, wealth, success, failure, luck,
intelligence, etc.
 d- Ka is also is the mirrored image of one’s double.

II. Ka and the Egyptians:


The Secret Doctrine explained that “The Egyptians were familiar
with this concept. The Egyptian Ka is the equivalent to the astral
double, model-body, or linga-sarira. The ancient Egyptians held that
when a human being was born, the ka was born with him and
remained with him throughout his life.”

*** *** ***

70. Multiple Dimensions’ Dividing Lines


“Kalem”

________________

Lines or graphs referred to as the invisible borders of multiple


adjacent zones of existences, also called multiple dimensions, and/or
parallel universes.
These lines serve also as a path or a passage that lead to a higher
sphere of knowledge.
From Kalem, derived the Hebrew word Kailem, which literally
means, vessels or vehicles; the vases for the source of the Waters of
Life, used in the Ten Sephiroth, and considered as the primeval
nuclei of all Kosmic Forces.

Some Kabalists and occulists stated that these lines or vessels appear
in our world, through twenty two canals, which are represented by
the twenty-two letters of the Hebrew alphabet, “thus making with the
Ten Sephiroth thirty-two paths of wisdom.”
According to Anunnaki-Ulema Li, “The world of humans is linked to
the afterlife through twenty two Kalem (Graphs). Some of these
graphs or lines are directly attached to the “Conduit” implanted in
the human brain, thus a trained adept can enter and exist other
dimensions by placing himself or herself on one of the “tracks” of
these lines.”

*** *** ***

71. Center of Energy


“Kama”

I. Definition
II. In Hebrew, esoterica and Kabala

_____________________

I. Definition:
Called “a center of energy”, by Ulema Oppenheimer.
Also referred to as the “Manifestation Square”, meaning a zone
where different forms of appearances, including beings and higher
entities manifest themselves for multiple reasons.
The Manifestation Square is indeed a physical area on Earth. Some
Ulema suggested that this Square serves as a platform for the Ba’ab.

According to Ulema Stanbouli, the Earth is full of these Squares.


However, they are not permanent, meaning they appear on Earth,
each time a cosmic molecule or “Buble” collides with another Bubble.
This happens cosmically.

In one of his Kiraat, Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette said, “The


Manifestation Squares materialize on Earth, when two distinct yet
very close dimension membranes “bump” into each other. Ulema
Stanbouli added, “The whole universe was created in this way.”

II. In Hebrew, esoterica and Kabala:


From Kama, derived the Hebrew word Kamea, which means a magic
square. In esoterica and occult studies, Kama or Kamea are a place,
or a zone used by Kabalists and occultists to communicate with non-
human entities in order to accomplish magical acts.

*** *** ***

73. Etheric Manifestation


“Karsha-bita”

I. Definition
II. The bird as a symbol of the soul

___________________

I. Definition:
An orb; an etheric manifestation, sometime referred to as one aspect
of the mind; others use the word “Soul” instead of mind. In a passage
from the Book of Ramadosh, Karsha-bita was described the lower
level of the Mind (Soul), equated with physical desires and ego.

II. The bird as a symbol of the soul:


E. Erickson stated that “The Persian word Karshipta derived from
Karsha-bita, for it reflects a striking similarity.
For instance, the Persian Karshipta in the Mazdean Scriptures means
the holy bird of Heaven, of which Ahura Mazda says to Zaratushta
that “he recites the Avesta in the language of birds.” The bird is the
symbol of “Soul” of Angel and Deva in every old religion.
It is easy to see, therefore, that this “holy bird” means the divine Ego
of man, or the Soul”.
*** *** ***

73. Hybrids’ Dwellings


“Korashag”
“Khur-Shag”

I. Definition and introduction


II. Description of the hybrids’ habitat
a- Human environment
b- Underground/underwater communities
III. Characteristics
Bedrooms, beds, toys, dining rooms, food, and eating habits
IV. Hybrid children habitat as described by an Anunnaki
a. Inside the base
b. The refectory
c. Hybrids’ three distinct groups/categories
d. Hybrids placed for adoption
e. Disposing of the food and cleaning the refectory
f. Dormitories and sleeping quarters
g. Attending various activities
h. The fetuses’ room

_____________________

Dwellings
“Korashag”, “Khur-Shag”
I. Definition and introduction
II. Description of the hybrids’ habitat
a- Human environment
b- Underground/underwater communities
III. Characteristics
Bedrooms, beds, toys, dining rooms, food, and eating habits
IV. Hybrid children habitat as described by an Anunnaki
a. Inside the base
b. The refectory
c. Hybrids’ three distinct groups/categories
d. Hybrids placed for adoption
e. Disposing of the food and cleaning the refectory
f. Dormitories and sleeping quarters
g. Attending various activities
h. The fetuses’ room

__________________

I. Definition and introduction:


Korashag “Khur-Sha” is an Anunnaki/Ulemite word for a hybrids’
habitat. The hybrid-human race is very different from hybrid
extraterrestrial race living on other planets. The hybrid-humans look
exactly like human beings, but are much shorter, and have different
facial structure.

II. Description of the hybrids’ habitat:


Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette said: These hybrid children live in
two different ways.

 a- Human environment:
The first is the human environment. This happens when a hybrid
child had been adopted by a human family, usually, by a high
ranking United States military man working with aliens in secret
military underground bases.
This top echelon military man adopts a hybrid child and raises him
or her as a human being. This happens much more often than most
people imagine.
 b- Underground/underwater communities:
The second kind of habitat is a large communal living in
underground and/ or underwater dormitories, or sometimes in
above ground level dormitories, but always on Earth.

III. Characteristics:
Bedrooms, beds, toys, dining rooms, food, and eating
habits.
 1. While the adult hybrid usually has his or her own room, the
children live together.
 2. Their dormitories are like a combination of old fashioned
orphanages, and military barracks.
 3. The rooms don’t have high ceilings, rarely over twelve feet,
they are extremely long, and they have no windows.
 4. The rooms are spotlessly clean; they are cleaned constantly
by a vacuum system that sucks away all dirt.
 5. They have no need of trash cans.
 6. The colors of the rooms are sad, nothing appealing about
them, dark, and basically gray metallic color.
 7. The beds are arranged on top of each other, like in a
submarine. There are no ladders reaching the higher level beds,
since the children can levitate. For each dormitory, there are
dozens and dozens of three beds row sections.
 8. These beds are assembled like prefab furniture, quickly
and efficiently. The materials the beds are built from are very
different from any material used in standard furniture. It is a
kind of metal, very smooth, and of silver-gray color. For the
second and third levels, parts of the bed are magnetic, so the
children can attach their toys to it.
 9. On the first level, the toys are around the bed. They are
given a choice of toys because the Grays believe the toys would
be part of their education and adjustment.
 10. If a child wishes to hide his or her toys, the bed can be
closed and pushed into the wall. For their bathroom needs, they
go to an adjacent room, also communal, where baths and toilets
are available to them.
 11. Cleanliness is scrupulously maintained there as well as in
the dormitory. The children eat in refectories.
 12. These dining rooms are long, and contain extremely long
tables. The food is served from within the table, which opens up
at the outside edge of the table and reveals the plates.
 13. When they finish eating, the plates, which are metal, are
left on the table. The table absorbs the plate and sends it to the
dishwasher. Despite all the precautions and the cleanliness,
many children die from various diseases and never reach
adulthood.
 14. When a child dies, he or she is cremated.
 15. The Grays refer to it as “incineration.”

III. Hybrid children habitat as described by an Anunnaki:


The following is an actual depiction of their habitat acoording to
Sinhar Ambar Anati, the Phoenician-American hybrid woman,
known to us as Victoria. She is married to SinharMarduck, an
Anunnaki leader.
Victoria (Ambar Anati) is conversing with her mother-in-law,
Sinharinannaschamra who is the mother of SinharMarduck. Here is
the text (Title; Visiting the Hybrids):

a. Inside the base:


Sinharinannaschamra said: “The base we are going to visit is an
underwater habitat. We are about to descend way down into the
Pacific.”“What about air?” I asked, a bit apprehensive about the idea.
Surely She won’t forget I could not breathe under water, but
still…“We pass through a lock that is safe for water and air,” said
Sinharinannaschamra, “and inside, it’s geared for the hybrids, which,
just like humans, need air.”
In a few minutes, we stopped and I assumed, correctly, that we were
already inside the base. “They are expecting us,” she said. “Don’t
worry about them. They know I can blow the whole place up if they
dare to give me any trouble.”
The spaceship’s door opened and I saw that we were inside a huge,
hangar-like room. If I had expected a beautiful, aquarium-like
window, showing the denizens of the deep playing in their blue
environment, I would have been disappointed. But knowing the
Grays, I expected nothing of the sort, and so the beige and gray
room, all metal and lacking any windows, did not exactly surprise
me.
“This base is enormous,” said Sinharinannaschamra. “It is used for
many operations, but we will just concentrate on the hybrids today.”
I was pleased to hear that, since I was secretly apprehensive about
the possibility of stumbling on one of the Grays’ hellish laboratories.
I will never forget, or forgive, what I saw in their lab. But I said
nothing and waited to see what was to happen next.
Sinharinannaschamra walked me to a solid wall, put her hand on it,
and wall shimmered a little and then moved, allowing a door to form
and open for us.

b. The refectory:
We entered a long corridor, illuminated by stark, white light, with
many regular doors on each side. Sinharinannaschamra opened one
of the doors and we entered a large room, obviously a refectory since
it contained extremely long tables, all made of metal. The room was
painted entirely in beige – tables, chairs, walls, and ceiling, and had
no windows. It was scrupulously clean. Suddenly, the tables opened
up, each table revealing a deep groove on each of its long sides.
Plates of what seemed to be normal human food were released from
the grooves, and placed each before a chair. At this moment, a few
doors opened at various parts of the room, and from each door an
orderly file of children came in and settled at the table.
They were completely silent, not a word was heard, as they picked up
their forks and began to eat. None of them paid any attention to us,
even though we stood at plain view. The children seemed to range
from six to twelve, but it was difficult to be sure of that. On one hand,
they were small and fragile, so I might have mistaken their ages.
On the other hand, their eyes gave the impression of almost old age.
They seemed wise beyond their tender years. Their hair was thin,
their skin was pale to gray, and they all wore white clothes of extreme
cleanliness.

c. Hybrids’ three distinct groups/categories:


Despite these similarities, which made them look as if they were all
related to each other, I could tell some differences between them that
seemed rather fundamental. It was almost as if they fitted within
three distinct groups. I mentioned it, in a whisper, to
Sinharinannaschamra, and she nodded. “Yes, you got it,” she said.
“They consist of early-stage hybrids, middle-stage hybrids, and late-
stage hybrids.
 1-The first group is born from the first combination of
abductees’ and Grays’ DNA. They closely resemble the Grays.
Look at their skin – the grayish color is very close to that of the
Grays, and so is the facial structure.
 2-The second group, the middle-stage hybrids, are the result
of mating between these early-stage ones, once they are old
enough for reproduction, and human abductees. The resulting
DNA is closer to humans, and so they look much more like
humans, and many of them lose the Progeria gene.
 3-The third group, the late-stage hybrid, is the most
important. Middle-stage hybrids are mated with humans to
create them – and they can hardly be distinguished from
humans.” “Yes, I can tell who the late-stagers are quite easily,” I
said.

d. Hybrids placed for adoption:


“But there are not too many of them here, right?” “This is true, not
too many are here. A large number of these hybrids, who represent
the most successful results of the experiments, are placed for
adoption with human families.”
“Are the human families aware of the origin of their children?”
“Yes, in most cases they are. Generally, they are adopted by a high-
ranking United States military man or woman, who had worked, or
still works, with aliens, in secret military bases. This happens much
more often than most people suspect… the spouse of the military
person may or may not know, depending on circumstances and
character traits. These lucky hybrids lead a much better life than
whose who are raised in places like this one, communally.”
“Are they badly treated here? Are they abused by the Grays?”
“No, the Grays don’t want to lose them, they are too valuable. But
they receive no love, no individual attention, there is no real
parenting, and the environment is barren and depressing. They live
like that until they are old enough to be of use in the experiments.
Not a very nice life for any child.”
“And what about Progeria? I mean, for the adopted ones.”
“Only the hybrids who are entirely free of Progeria are adopted by
human families. We even suspect, though we are not sure, that many
of the Progeria stricken late-stagers are killed, since their Progeria
gene is too strong. The Grays believe that after these three attempts,
it cannot be eradicated by further breeding.”
“And so they kill the poor things… what is the motive for all these
atrocities?”
“All for the same reason I have mentioned. They think they somehow
will save their civilization. But they are doomed.”
“But in the meantime, they harm, torture, and kill so many people.
I don’t understand why it is tolerated.” Sinharinannaschamra did not
answer.

e. Disposing of the food and cleaning the refectory:


The children finished eating, still in complete silence. Each child, as
he or she finished his meal, leaned back into the chair, and as soon as
all of them were leaning back, the groove from which the plates came
opened up, and re-absorbed all the plates.
“They now go to an automatic dishwashing machine,” explained
Sinharinannaschamra.
The children got up, and left the dismal room in the same file
arrangement they came in. As soon as the room was empty, large
vacuum cleaners emerged from the wall and sucked up every crumb,
every piece of debris.
Then they sprayed the tables and floor with a liquid that smelled like
a disinfectant. The room was spotlessly clean again, ready for the
next sad, depressing meal.

f. Dormitories and sleeping quarters:


“Shall we go to the dormitories now?”
Asked Sinharinannaschamra. I nodded.
We followed the children through one of the doors, and entered a
place that was a combination of an old-fashioned orphanage and
military barracks.
It was a very large room, but the ceiling was not high, only about
twelve feet. Again, everything was beige and gray, and there were no
windows to relieve the monotony.
The room was full of beds, arranged above each other in groups of
three, like in a submarine. Dozens and dozens of such rows seemed
to stretch to a very long distance.
The beds were made of some metal, very smooth, and of silver-gray
color. They seemed to be assembled like prefab furniture.
“Sinharinannaschamra,” I said, “there are no ladders. How do the
children reach the upper levels?”
“They can levitate,” said Sinharinannaschamra.
“Look at this. Part of each bed is magnetic, so each child can have his
or her toys attach to it. As for the lower beds, the toys are stored next
to them.”
“So they have toys,” I said.
“That’s a mercy.”
“Yes, the Grays discovered that mental stimulation is highly
important to the hybrids’ development. There are plenty of other
activities, mostly with abductees, that relieve their lives of the
tedium, at least to a certain extent.”
“But they have no privacy at all.”
“None whatsoever, they only get their own room when they are more
mature, but they have one thing that pleases them. If the children
want to, they can put their things in their bed, close the bed with a
panel, and hide it inside a wall. They like that.”
“I wonder, too, if it is not a comfort for them to be together, after all.”
“Their feelings and emotional climate are not exactly human…it’s
hard to explain.
I think it’s time for you to see them interact.”
“Where are all the children now?” “They are attending various
activities,” said Sinharinannaschamra.
“Come, I’ll show you.”

g. Attending various activities:


We entered a room that opened directly from the dormitory. To my
surprise, it was really a glass bubble. You could see the outside,
which was an unpleasant desert surrounding. I found it nasty, but I
figured that to the children it might have represented a pleasant
change. About ten children, seemingly between the ages of six and
eight, sat on the ground, which was simply the desert sand. They
were playing with normal human toys – trucks, cars, and trains.
They filled the things with sand, using plastic trowels that one
usually sees on the beach. They were also building tunnels from the
sand, wetting it with water from large containers that stood here and
there.
They seemed to be enjoying their games, certainly concentrating on
them, but their demeanor remained quiet and subdued, and they did
not engage in the laughter, screaming, yelling, or fighting that
children of this age usually produce.
“They also have rooms with climbing equipment, and places to play
ball,” said Sinharinannaschamra.
“It is needed to strengthen their bones and muscles,” she added.
I approached the children, a little apprehensively, worrying that I
might frighten the poor things. They looked up at me, seemingly
waiting for me to do something, but I was pleased to realize that they
were not afraid.
I sat on the sand, took some stones that were scattered around, and
arranged them so that they created a little road. The children stared
at me for a minute with their strange, wise eyes, as if trying to read
my thoughts, and almost instantly grasped the idea and continued to
build the road together. None of them smiled, but they seemed very
much engaged in the new activity. Once all the stones were used,
they looked at me again, as if trying to absorb information, and sure
enough, after a minute they took the trucks and make them travel on
the little road. I got up and let them play.
“So they read minds,” I said to Sinharinannaschamra.
“To an extent,” she said. “At this age, they basically just absorb
images you project. You probably thought about the trucks going on
this road, and they saw it…” and she added. “And everything was
done together, as if they were mentally connected,”
I asked: “Do they do everything together?”
“Yes, everything is communal, even the bathrooms where they clean
themselves. But don’t be too upset about it. If they are separated
from each other before their adolescence, they are extremely upset. It
is almost as if the onset of puberty makes them an individual, and
before that they have a group mentality.”
“Horrible,” I said.
“They are not unhappy,” said Sinharinannaschamra.
“Only as adolescents, when they break off the communal mind, they
understand how unhappy they are. But we will visit the adolescents
on another occasion.”
“Very well,” I said.

h. The fetuses’ room:


Sinharinannaschamra asked: “Would you like to see the room where
they keep the fetuses?” I followed her to the corridor, and we walked
quite a distance before opening another door.
We entered another one of the hangar-sized rooms, full of tanks.
“Each tank contains colored and different liquid nutrients,” said
Sinharinannaschamra.
“This is where they put the fetuses, as soon as they are removed from
the abductees. The tanks are arranged in order, from the youngest
fetuses to those that are almost ready to be removed.”
“Do they separate them into their stages?” I asked.
“Yes, this room is for early stagers only. In other rooms, they have
the middle stagers. But the late stagers remain in the mother’s womb
until birth, to make them as close to humans as possible.”
“And what are the babies like?”
“Quiet, not as responsive as human babies. Many of them die as soon
as they are removed from the tank. Those that survive are generally
mentally well developed, physically weak, and emotionally subdued.”
“And who takes care of them?”
“Both the Grays and the abductees. The Grays perform most of the
physical requirements, but the abductees supply the human touch.
We can’t go there yet.”
“How come?”
“We need to prepare you to interact with abductees. They are very
complicated. We shall have a few sessions about interacting with
them at the same time we teach you how to work with the
adolescents. Also, you wanted some instructions of how to contact
and help those people that are children of humans and Anunnaki,
like your son. This should take some teaching, too.”
We went back to our spaceship, not saying much. I remember
thinking that if I were part of the Anunnaki Council, I would vote to
kill every Gray in the known universe. Of course I did not say it to
Sinharinannaschamra, but I am sure she knew how I felt. Back
home, I went to my beloved garden and sat under a tree that
constantly showered tiny blossoms on me, like little snowflakes. I did
not even know I was crying.
“What is the matter?” said Marduchk, who suddenly appeared next
to me. I told him about the visit with the hybrids.
“The hybrids are not abused,” said Marduchk.
“Something else is bothering you.” I thought for a moment, and then
decided I might as well be honest with him. “Yes,” I said.
“I cannot understand the Anunnaki’s casual attitude about the fact
that thousands of human beings are tortured and killed all the time.
Neither you nor Sinharinannaschamra seem to be as shocked as I am
about the fact that the Grays engage in such atrocities.” Marduchk
was quiet for a minute, thinking. At this conversation, we did not use
the Conduit, because at my agitated state I found it difficult. I was
not entirely used to it as yet. So I waited for him to say what he
thought. “I see your point,” he said. “You think we are callous about
it.”
“Yes, I do, to tell you the truth. Why don’t you destroy the Grays?
Why do you allow so much death, so much pain? Are you, after all,
cruel beings? Have you become callous because you have lived so
many years, and became thick-skinned about suffering?”
“No, we are not cruel. It’s just that we view life and death differently
than you do. We cannot destroy all the Grays, even if we wanted to.
We don’t commit genocide, even if they try to do it. But we don’t
want to kill them. We know that they will die on their own.” “And in
the meantime, suffering means nothing to you?” “It means a lot, but
destroying the Grays would not eliminate suffering in all the
universes we go to. There are other species that are even worse, you
just don’t know them because the objects of their behavior are not
humans.”
“It seems to me, that even though you are so much more
sophisticated than the humans, the fact that you deny the existence
of God may have deprived you of your ethics, after all.”
“Deny God? What makes you think we deny God?” asked Marduchk.
He seemed genuinely surprised. “Marduchk, you have told me, more
than once, that the Anunnaki created the human race, not God. So
where is God if He is not the Creator? Your statements are
contradictory.”

*** *** ***


74. Physical manifestation of a dead person,
before entering another dimension
“Kusir and Lalladu”


1. Introduction
2. Kusir and Lalladu
a. Meaning of Kusir
Kusir-Ra
Kusir-Ji
b. Meaning of Lalladu

__________________

1. Introduction:
Ulema Lafayette said, “Quite often, students and readers alike, ask
me questions about what does happen to a person, at the moment,
the “Soul” or the “Mind” leaves her/his body? Does the “Soul” hang
around for a while, or it goes straight to hell or heaven?
A more stimulating and unexpected question – in that context –
came from a skeptic currently residing in Madrid, who never
believed in anything Anunnaki. He asked me, word for word: “I know
what will happen to me when I die. My soul leaves my body, and goes
to heaven, because I am a good Catholic. Now, you tell me what
happens to an Anunnaki when he dies.
I am particularly interested in what happens to the body and soul of
this or that Anunnaki you claim is living here among us? Does he go
to heaven?”
The truth is, long time ago, and while I was at the Ulema Ma’had
(School), I heard a novice from Burma asking my Ulema teacher,
similar questions, perhaps more colorful.
The student asked the honorable Master: “Does your Anunnaki
teacher who visits with you on earth die like all of us? And if he dies
on earth, like all of us, does he leave his dead body on earth to be
cremated? Or the Anunnaki will come to earth to take his body?”
Quite interesting questions indeed.
I have never heard any spiritual channeler, or a so-called “Psychic
Extraterrestrial medium” discussing these subjects, and/or
explaining what exactly does happen to the body of an
extraterrestrial, and especially an Anunnaki, when she/he dies on
earth, despite their fantasmagoric and far-fetched theories visions,
jargons and warnings about the Anunnaki!

Did the Ulema address these issues?


Of course they did. Honorable Master Sorenstein said, that in the
Ulemite and Ana’kh literature, there are two important words or
terms that refer to these situations. These two words are: Kusir and
Lalladu.”

2. Kusir and Lalladu:

a. Meaning of Kusir: Also Kiaba as it appeared in the “Book of


Ramadosh”.
De Lafayette said, “Kusir is a term for the physical manifestation of a
dead person, before entering another dimension, and/or during the
40 day period following his/her death. The Anunnaki-Ulema said
that there are two categories of Kusir:

 Kusir-Ra: A physical projection of a dead human being who


died from a natural cause. This apparition occurs when the
etheric-plasmic body of a deceased person (Any age, any
gender) has retained enough particles-energy to manifest its
previous physical form. Usually, it appears before relatives and
loved ones.
Pets also can re-appear before their owners; however, their physical
projection is not always complete.
Quite often some parts of their bodies are missing.

 Kusir-Ji: A physical projection of a deceased killed by acts of


violence, suicide, and similar tragic means.

The apparition occurs via an ectoplasmic/holographic projection,


and/or particles’ condensation. But it lasts briefly, for the energy
contained in the apparition or the projection is not strong enough to
last for more than 5 seconds.
Usually, entities and/or human shapes that reappear through Kusir-
Ji reflect au aura of sadness and confusion. In this state of mind, the
deceased is not fully convinced that he/she is in fact dead.

b. Meaning of Lalladu: Lalladu is a term referring to the final


moment when an Anunnaki-Ulema, or an Anunnaki-Hybrid
relinquishes her/his earthly body, before departing Earth.
Some occultists describe this phenomenon as a disintegration of the
molecules of the body, and the “Conduit” in the physical body, at the
time of the death of an Anunnaki, temporarily sojourning in a
physical dimension like Earth.
According to Ulema Al Saddik, “An Anunnaki-Ulema does not leave
a dead physical body behind her/him.”

Note: There is an interesting reference to this phenomenon, in the


book “Anunnaki Ultimatum”, I co-authored with Dr. Ilil Arbel.
Here is an authorized excerpt from the epilogue of the book: Farewell
to Victoria.

Note: Victoria is an Anunnaki-Hybrid woman who has lived on Earth


for several years. She was known to her friend as Victoria. Her
Anunnaki’s name is Ambar Anati. In fact, she lived in Lower
Manhattan, in New York City, and had two meetings with the US
government in Northwest Georgetown, in Washington, D.C. In the
epilogue, Ambar Anati explained what exactly happens to an
Anunnaki dead body.
Here is the text:
“The most amazing revelations we have heard so far, when the time
has come to say goodbye to our dear friend (Ambar Anati) whom we
have grown to love.
It was a gray early afternoon, and it looked as if a storm was
gathering.
We (Dr. Arbel and Maximillien de Lafayette) were at the office,
working on various projects. It was a couple of weeks since last time
we talked to Victoria, but generally she called in the early evening, so
we did not expect to hear from her quite yet. Suddenly the phone
rang, and there she was, to our surprise.
From the first moment, we knew that this telephone call was not one
of our usual sessions. Victoria just did not sound the same. As our
readers probably know by now, she is usually calm, pleasant, and can
say the most amazing, even harrowing things with the most matter-
of-fact simplicity to which, by now, we have become quite
accustomed. But this time her voice was strained, and she seemed to
be in a hurry.
“What is it, Victoria? What is wrong?” we asked.
“My friends, I have come to say goodbye. This is the last time I
will be able to talk to you.”
“What happened? Are you in need of help? Can we do
anything?”
“I am a hunted woman, to tell the truth,” said Victoria. “I
exploded a contaminated air base, killed many contaminated people.
I tried to warn them, one last time, but instead of listening, they
decided to lock me up until I died of claustrophobia. It’s time for me
to leave.”
“So why don’t you get in touch with Nibiru, and have Sinhar
Marduchk come and get you in his space ship?” we asked.
“Because saving me and taking me to Nibiru will not be enough
to make me survive,” said Victoria.
“Are you wounded?”
“No, that would be nothing. I can heal wounds on my own, like
all Anunnaki.”
“So is there anything else wrong? Do you need medical
attention? We can get a doctor and say nothing about who you are.”
“No, I am quite well,” said Victoria. “I am not sure how to
explain this… well, the point is, the time has come and I must die,
right here on earth.”
We both jumped to our feet. “Die? Why must you die? Surely
with your superior powers you can best any humans who want to
harass you?”
“It’s not that… You see, after what happened, I cannot stay on
earth, and with this body, I cannot live on Nibiru and still achieve the
long life I have been promised if I become a full Anunnaki. And to
become a full Anunnaki, I must die.
But there is more to this than just the practical aspect. By living
here for so long, by associating with the Grays, Hybrids, and
contaminated humans, I am contaminated myself.
I have to get rid of all this filth. If Marduchk just takes me to
Nibiru, and I change into the new body, I will still carry some of the
contamination to Nibiru.”
We were confused. If she wishes to live a long life, how can she
die? We did not even know what to ask, and waited for her to
continue.

“My body will die. But my mind, loaded with the imprint of my
DNA, will not die. It will rush to a place we call the Ba’ab. This word
in Ana’kh means gate, and I believe it was adopted by various
languages on Earth.
The Ba’ab is something like, but not exactly, a white wormhole.
Things can pass from one universe to another, or traverse huge
distances, through the Ba’ab, in a blink of an eye.”
“And what happens to your mind when it passes through the
Ba’ab?” we asked.
“Everything has to be fully coordinated,” said Victoria, “or else,
the mind can be lost in the universe. They will wait for me on Nibiru,
with a body-copy they have already prepared years ago.
This body, incidentally, is full Anunnaki, without any human
characteristics, as I committed myself to many years ago when I
married Marduchk.
My mind, which on Earth you will probably refer to as my soul,
must hit the Ba’ab at the absolute right moment, pass through it, and
in a split second enter the body-copy. Otherwise, I will be lost.
They may look for me, and perhaps even find me, but the odds
are against it; the universe is just too vast. Therefore, I must hit the
Ba’ab properly.
It would have been easier if I were transferring from my body
into a copy on Nibiru, with Sinhar Inannaschamra to direct me, since
she is an expert on such things. But I have no choice, since my Earth
body must remain here.
In other words, I simply must die. Unfortunately, I am not
experienced with navigating the Ba’abs. But I must take the chance. I
must risk it.”
By that time we were crying. “So why not stay here, in hiding?
At least live out your life before you chance it all?”
Victoria sighed. “I am sixty years old,” she said, “and while sixty
is not old by any means, I have lived a very intense life for the last
thirty years. My body is worn out, and I am very tired. I am willing to
take the risk.”
“And what about your son?”
“I finally have to realize that I must give him up, let him live his
own life, stop worrying about him. He will be fine, he is young, he
will do his work for which he was conceived, and later prepared from
birth and on.
There are a couple of options for him.
I believe the Anunnaki will destroy the Earth in 2022, and only
the uncontaminated will survive. Of course, in this case, he will be
saved. If there is a postponement of the destructions, another option
exists.
By the time he is relatively old, and his work done, we will come
for him, since he is really one hundred percent Anunnaki, and he
deserves some reward after a life in service of humanity. Not too
many Anunnaki are so inclined…”
“Why is that so?”
“The Anunnaki still love you, deep down, since you are their
creations. But they are very strongly disappointed in humanity. The
cruelty which humanity expresses is more like the Grays’ than the
Anunnaki’s, who revere all life. You torture, you kill, you abuse the
children and the elderly, and you eat animal bodies.
The greed and disloyalty that you express would have been
easier to bear, for the Anunnaki, they would have been willing to
teach you how to overcome it, but not the viciousness. And yet, they
will still help, intervene, at least sometimes, and wait until such time
when humanity wakes up and realizes that the atrocities must stop.
Then the Anunnaki will return and bring long life, health, and joy.
But not before.”
“But won’t you miss your son?”
“Of course I will, but I have learned that it is essential not to be
too strongly tied to anything on Earth. There have been Anunnaki
who got attached to things of the flesh, or to personal associations, to
such an extent that they have lost their Anunnaki spirit and are still
wandering Earth, thousands of years later, unable to reconnect with
their true home.”
“But Victoria, how will we know that you have reached the
Ba’ab and entered your body-copy? We would not be able to bear not
knowing. The thought that your beautiful soul might be lost is too
much.”
“If I succeed, if I am not lost, I will give you a sign. Let’s agree
on a very clear one. Let’s see…I know! Do you have houseplants in
the office?”
“Yes, many, on a large and sunny windowsill.”
“Then when all is accomplished, every single one of your
houseplants will burst into bloom, even those that normally have no
flowers. And the lights will flicker three times, off and on.” She
laughed, and we laughed with her, with tears in our eyes.
“How will you die, Victoria? You won’t be in pain, will you?”
“Oh, no. I was told to go to a place that has water, trees, and
flowers. I will sit under a tree, close my eyes, and my mind will
separate from my body, quite peacefully. They taught me how to do it
and promised me that it will be entirely painless.”
“It is rainy and dark here. Are you somewhere warm and
sunny? Will you get wet and uncomfortable?”
“No, I am far away from you. It’s sunny and pleasant here. The
tree I am going to sit under is a big, beautiful willow.”
“Will you sleep? Will you feel anything?”
“Oh, no, I have to be fully aware of the circumstances to be able
to do the job. I will be completely alert, and in an instant, I will use
my Conduit to enter the Ba’ab, if all goes well.”
“Will your body be found by anyone?”
“I have no idea, it really does not matter in any way, it’s just a
body; perhaps it will disintegrate, who knows.”
“May we ask where it is going to happen? Perhaps we could go
there afterwards, just to feel that we have been with you?”
“You are so kind, my friends, but no, I can’t tell you, I am not
permitted. You see, in the very distance past, humans thought that
the Anunnaki were gods. You know some of their names – Inanna,
Enlil, Ninlil, El… of course they were not gods, they were Anunnakis,
and as a matter of fact, they are alive and well on Nibiru, engaged in
their new missions.
One name I daresay you already recognize from my story, but
we will not dwell on it, or she may be angry with me. At any rate, if
my place of death is discovered, how are we to be sure that it won’t
some day become a place of worship, when humanity is just a little
more attuned to the Anunnaki again?
We can’t risk that. But please don’t be upset with me about it.
After all, I won’t be there. I will be flying to my destiny in Nibiru
through the Ba’ab.”
“It’s so hard to part from you, Victoria. Will you ever be in
touch again?”
“Who knows? If I survive, I might see you in 2022.”
“Are you sure we will be alive then?”
“Oh, yes. I have already taken care to extend your lives. This
will happen to all the surviving humans when the Anunnaki come
back. You will experience a much, much longer lifespan.”
“How wonderful and kind of you. And it is so strange to think
about a very long lifespan…”
“The universe is so full of strange things, strange phenomena,”
said Victoria. “I will always love you and think kindly of you, no
matter what happens.”
“But you will be a full Anunnaki. Won’t you lose your human
interests?”
“I have always been almost a full Anunnaki, to tell the truth. My
DNA was ninety percent Anunnaki. From the time I enter my new
body, I will be a hundred percent Anunnaki. They will probably start
calling me by my Anunnaki name, Sinhar Ambar-Anati.
I hope Marduchk doesn’t and goes on calling me Victoria… it
will feel so strange to have him call me by a new name. Incidentally,
the only reason I was human in my views is because I was raised by
humans.
But think about it, I never cared about so many things humans
care about, such as money, or sex, or possessions. That I am hoping,
with all my heart, that humanity will learn to change its ways and
that we should all meet again. You know by now that death really
does not exist, even if you can’t fully grasp it. Someday you shall.”
“When will your death happen, Victoria?”
“In a few minutes, I expect. I am now sitting under the willow,
talking on my cell phone, and I am still acting like a normal human
being; a woman talking on a cellular phone! Incidentally, I have a gift
for you, which I have already mailed you a couple of days ago and
you should receive shortly. It is something you will like very much,
and it was sent with the blessings and approval of my husband. A
surprise!”
“Goodbye, Victoria,” we said, crying. “Good bye and a safe,
good trip. We are watching with you.” But she was no longer on the
phone.
We sat in silence.
Will she make it to the gate?
Would the Ba’ab open for her?
Would our dear friend make it to her new body and be warmly
welcomed by her family, or would she forever wander the universe,
alone, homeless?
We waited for the sign, breathlessly. We had no idea how long
it would take. Suddenly the doorbell rang, and the mailman came
with a package. We knew what it was. It had to be Victoria’s last gift.
What could it be?
We opened the package carefully, and inside were two
notebooks and a letter. “Dear friends,” said the letter. “This is the
facsimile of the professional diary of my husband, containing much
about his work over many years.
It should be very useful for you in your future work, and you are
allowed to reveal anything you wish from it to humanity, with
Marduchk’s fond wishes that it may help humanity overcome its
flaws and grow in the right direction.
The small book is a dictionary. We know that Ana’kh is a
difficult language, and the dictionary may help. Enjoy both! With
love, Victoria.”
We looked at the books with reverence, trying to decipher the
words. The large notebook had a title, which we understood to be
“Sinhar Marduchk’s Diary.”
The small book was titled something like “Lexicon of the
Ana’kh Language.” Understanding the books should take some time,
it was obvious, but what a treasure. Naturally, thought, we could not
concentrate. It was already about fifteen minutes after our
conversation with Victoria. Surely, by now she would either have
succeeded – or she has failed…
The tension was too much to bear, and yet, there was nothing
we could do but wait. She said, a few minutes… it was much later
than that. We were losing our hope. It became dark in the office, the
clouds were driven by the wind and became a heavy layer.
We turned on the light and just sat there, waiting…tears in our
eyes.
Suddenly, the light flickered. We looked up, hoping against
hope. Could it just be the brewing storm?
It flickered again.
The thunder rolled, and the rain started falling down in sheets.
And then it flickered for the third time.
There was no question, it had to be her sign – and at this
instant, without warning, the room filled with intense floral scent.
We ran to the window sill. Every single plant was covered with
immense flowers – yellow, white, rose, red – flowers that were never
seen on Earth, flowers that had to come straight from paradise – or
from Nibiru, or from Victoria’s heart.
Victoria has made it home.”

*** *** ***

75. Reading Past, Present, and Future Events


From the Life of one Single Person
“La-abrida” , “Bzi’ra-irdu”

1. Definition and introduction


2. Synopsis of mode of operation
3. The beginning of everything; multiples existences and “God’s
Particle”
4. La-abrida “Bzi’ra-irdu”; is it a tool to go back in time or jump
into the future?
5. Can I use La-abrida“Bzi’ra-irdu” to ameliorate my life, and
change my destiny?
6. Revisiting your childhood in another dimension, in another time
7. The invisible and thin quantum line dividing two space-time
dimensions
8. Q&A

______________________
75. Reading Past, Present, and Future Events
From the Life of one Single Person
“La-abrida” , “Bzi’ra-irdu”

1. Definition and introduction


2. Synopsis of mode of operation
3. The beginning of everything; multiples existences and “God’s
Particle”
4. La-abrida “Bzi’ra-irdu”; is it a tool to go back in time or jump
into the future?
5. Can I use La-abrida“Bzi’ra-irdu” to ameliorate my life, and
change my destiny?
6. Revisiting your childhood in another dimension, in another time
7. The invisible and thin quantum line dividing two space-time
dimensions
8. Q&A

_________________

1. Definition and introduction:


As stated verbatim by Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette:
A rectangular glass table, that resonates, when metallic cards are
placed on its surface.
 The word “glass” is hereby used for lack of proper
terminology. The material is transparent like glass, but the
substance is very different, and cannot be described, using our
Earth’s vocabularies.
 The “metallic cards” represent thin and encoded boards. The
word “metallic” is hereby used, for lack of proper terminology.
 Each card contains sequences of numbers and dots,
perforated on one side of each card.
 Misinformed researchers nicknamed the cards “Galactic
Tarot”. It is incorrect.
 The cards project and interpret sequences and passages from
an individual’s life in one particular dimension; one space-time
sphere at the time.
 Duplicate, and/or multiple projections of different lives in
different dimensions are also possible.
 However, the projection of any of a person’s multiple lives
existing in separate universes has no bearing or any effect on
the current existence in the third dimension.
 Alteration of past events in a different dimension does not
categorically alter current events in the third dimension.
 However, the results and direct consequences of such
alteration could and would cange the course of life, and events
to occur in the present and the near future of an individual, if
the person’s “Conduit” (Brain cell Conduit) is activated.
 On Earth, a person could be an illustrious writer, while in a
second or a parallel dimension; the very same person is totally
illiterate. People live different lives in different dimensions.
 On Earth, a person for instance is a distinguished judge, while
in another dimension; the very same person is an outlaw.
 Removing, altering and/or erasing a crime committed by a
person in another dimension does not categorically “clean”,
and/or delete the “Galactic Record” of that person on the
“Conscience-Cosmic-Net”. That person is still held liable for
his/her action, and will be punished for his/her crime.
 For instance, on Earth (Third dimension), you are 40 year
old, while in the same time, you could be 60 year old, or not
even born, in another dimension (Universe).
 In some dimensions, Alexander the Great is still on his way to
ancient Persia, and Jesus is not yet crucified.
 The sequences constitute the code.
 The code is the key to a wide variety of information and data
about individuals.
 In other words, each card could be interpreted as a microchip.
 The microchip stores every single event (Past, present and
future) in the life of a person, including, duplications of similar
or different occurrences on other planes.
 “Other planes” mean a separate form of existence in a parallel
dimension.
 “Resonate” means responding to the placement of the card
upon the surface of the glass table.
 “Responding” means, reading and/or deciphering the code
(Key to information) of the data and information stored in each
card.

*** *** ***

2. Synopsis of mode of operation:


Ulema de Lafayette said:
 La abrida “Bzi’ra-irdu”, functions like “Miraya”, “Minzar”,
and “Mnaizar”.
 However, the use of the La-abrida is limited to reading past,
present, and future events in the life of one single person.
 When a card is placed on the top of the glass table, the card
changes properties, shape and form.
 The “metallic” structural substance of the card becomes
translucent, and merges with the glass surface.
 To the naked eye, it appears as if the card was totally
absorbed by the glass surface. However, the size of the card
remains intact.
 The shape of the card becomes circular, but retains its
original size, meaning, each card occupies the same space,
before the shape was changed.
 Thus, the form of the card becomes either circular or conical.
 Almost instantly, conic pages open up on the glass surface of
the table. Usually, three to four pages, aligned horizontally.
 Each page has a distinct color, ranging from light green to
almost transparent blue.
 Words, geometric symbols, dots, and numbers appear on
each page.
 They are the data and information pertaining to the
“existence” of one person in multiple spheres (Separate
existences in multiple life-form universes.)
 This means, that individuals (Humans and animals alike) do
live separately and independently as 4 distinct living persons in
4 distinct dimensions, or more.
 Contemporary quantum physics theorists totally accept this
reality. Many books and articles discussed this
incomprehensible phenomenon.
 The multiple and separate existences (In our case, 4) are
called in quantum physics membranes, or simply branes.
 Each membrane represents a separate world, called
dimension in contemporary quantum physics. In other words,
that dimension refers to “another universe”.
 So far, quantum physics theorists have accepted the notion
that, there are 11 dimensions in our universe.
 On the glass surface of the La abrida “Bzi’ra-irdu”, the adept
will be able to see (In miniature) four different dimensions.
 Each one of them, containing a duplicate (Identical or totally
different) of himself or herself, his or her total life, habitat,
physical appearance, preoccupations, and environment.
 In other words, the adept is watching simultaneously his/her
other four existences/lives in four separate universes. And this
concept has become a major part of the modern study and
research of cosmology, and quantum physics, usually discussed
under various theories, such as the “Multiverse”, the “M
Theory”, the “String Theory”, the “Membranes Theory,” so on.

3. The beginning of everything:


Multiples existences and “God’s Particle”.
Ulema Haroon Bakri bin Rached Al Ansari, and Ulema Mordechai
ben Zvi provided the following explanation.
Herewith reproduced verbatim, word for word, and unedited. Taken
from their Kira’at (Readings), Kiramat Ketab (Book of the good
deeds), Hadith (Speech; dialogue) and Rou’ya (Visions; insight):
 Time is not linear. Thus, the landscape of so called time and
space is not the same in other worlds.
 In multiple universes, the past, the present, and the future are
all contained in one particle.
 This particle is the “Cell of Everything”.
 This means, everything that has existed before, and shall exist
afterward. It is the origin of the creation.
 The particle is the beginning of everything that is everlasting.
Quantum physics theorists call this cell or particle the “God’s
Particle”.
 In this cell, you will find all the “Bubbles” (Term used by
modern cosmologists) that collided together to create all the
universes, galaxies, and planets in the cosmos.
 Who created the God’s Particle?
 Who created the universe?
 Who created time?
 Who crerated “God”?
 Is there one single Creator who created everything in the
universe, including humans and non-humans?
 The God’s particle was at the beginning of everything. And
everything was not in existence. Thus, before the particle, time
did not exist, space did not exist, the past did not exist, the
future did not exist, humans did not exist, and religions did not
exist; in brief nothing existed.
 The Universe was not created by one single creator. The
universe was not created by a “Big Bang.”
 The universe emerged from itself, from within.
 And when, the nothingness of existence of all forms and
substances suddenly collided with itself, the whole universe
exploded into billions and billions of stars, galaxies, planets,
and layers of dimensions.
 In some universes, the coagulation of time with the landscape
of space created time.
 When time was created by the collision of universes
(Bubbles), galaxies and universes took shape and place in the
cosmos.
 On some planets, and in some galaxies, photosynthesis,
metabolism, followed by micro-biological evolution created
multiple life-forms everywhere.
 Some of these life-forms produced all kinds and shapes of
organic and botanic substances, stones, mountains, gases,
waters, atmospheres. In some dimensions, different intelligent
life forms were created.
 We call this intelligent life-form “Kir-Ra-Ibra”, meaning the
faculty of reasoning and creating.
 The primordial intelligent life-form belonged to very
advanced galactic races inhabiting billions of stars and planets.
 Billions of years later, the human race was genetically created
by some of these very advanced intelligent life-forms, such as
the Anunnaki, Igigi, and Lyrans.
 When pre-humans, proto-humans, and quasi-human began
to populate the Earth, time did not exist at that point in history.
 Later, much later, when the Lyrans, Igigi, and the Anunnaki
commenced to experiment with the archaic human species
(They were 47 different categories), they installed in the brain
of the human beings, some form of intelligence.
 Some early humans were fortunate to receive the “Conduit”,
the invisible cell in the brain that produces all sorts of human
activities and thoughts.
 When the early human beings began to reason, the notion of
time was conceived.
 Thus, “Time” became the invention of humans.
 Time exists on Earth, not on other dimensions.
4. La-abrida “Bzi’ra-irdu”:
Is it a tool to go back in time or jump into the future?
Is it physical or ethereal?

Ulema Maximillien de Lafayette explained:


 No. Because, if you want to go back in time, and/or visit the
future, you have to depart from this dimension (Earth), where
you currently live.
 Once, you are outside the perimeter of the third dimension
(Earth), time bends on itself.
 Space bends on itself. And you are caught in the middle.
 However, you can escape this dilemma, and realign yourself,
following the cadence/rhythm of all dimensions beyond the
third one.
 How, will you accomplish this? We will elaborate on this,
when we study the “Parallel Synchronization.”
 Since time does not exist, the enlightened ones (Many of you
are enlightened) will be able to watch themselves living
separately in different worlds.
 This is what La abrida “Bzi’ra-irdu” does. It allows you to
“see” not to revisit the past or jump into the future, unless your
“Conduit” is fully activated.
 Once you are outside the physical realm (Earth), you
immediately connect with the beginning of everything in the
universe.
 You become part of “God’s Particle.”
 However, and as we have explained before, revisiting the so-
called past is possible if you use the Gomatirach Minzari.
 But bear in mind, you are not visiting, but transposing
yourself, unless your “Conduit” is fully activated.

5. Can I use the “La-abrida” to ameliorate my life, and


change my destiny?
“Yes,” said Ulema Kanazawa.
He added, verbatim: “However, you cannot alter the laws of cause
and effect; something similar to what you call Karma, but in reality,
it is quite different from Karma, because there is no place for
reincarnation in the world of the Anunnaki.
There are the Anunnaki’s norms that remain universal wherever you
go, although they are norms per se, but not necessary cosmic laws.

 On Earth, you are accountable for all your actions.


 The same applies in all the dimensions, realms, and spheres
of time, and space.
 However, in a different form of existence, or dimension, the
nature and understanding of certain moral and ethical laws
might change considerably.
 Such change has a paramount effect on the level of
enlightenment and happiness you wish to reach.
 On Earth, we have what we call the human law, the natural
law, and dogma establishing acceptable behavior in societies
and communities.
 These laws quite often change in virtue of our understanding
of what is right, and what is wrong. They also change, as time
changes, as our form of government changes, as a majority’s
power and influence change, regionally and nationally.
 Nothing is truthfully permanent on Earth.
 In the galactic perimeter of advanced and “spiritual”
communities, values do not change. They are permanent and
universal, and they govern the general conduct of life-forms
and intelligent entities, in the entire universe.
 If you enter a particular dimension, far away from Earth, or
too close to Earth, you might encounter social rules that are in
sharp contrast with laws on Earth.
 This could confuse your mind, and prevent you from
understanding and/or recognizing what is right, and what is
wrong.
 If this should happen to you, you will not be able to
ameliorate your life, and change your destiny, when you return
to Earth, and/or to the present.
 Something else you should take into consideration.
 What kind of destiny, success, happiness, prosperity and
advancement are you talking about?
 Are they those your are aiming at, upon returning to Earth, or
those you are seeking after death? Or, possibly those that exist
in a dimension close to Earth?
 The Anunnaki-Ulema can simultaneously live in two or three
different dimensions, and coordinate their actions via the
“Conduit”.
 We call this, the “Universal Conduit”.
 Humans have not yet reached a level of morality and
“spirituality” that allows them to live and relive in separate
dimensions at the same time.
 Although, some humans might be invited to visit another
dimension and acquire a great deal of knowledge, wisdom, and
even supernatural powers, upon their return to Earth, they will
instantly forget whatever they have learned, heard and seen,
unless they are spiritually developed, and guided by the
enlightened ones.
 Thus, in order to ameliorate you destiny, prosper in your
endeavors, and preserve a good health, you must be able to
differentiate between what is right and what is wrong, at a
galactic level.
 You must become acquainted with the universal truth; the
galactic harmony of things.
 Truth in the “outer cosmos” is quite different from the truth
you find on Earth.
 Only your activated “Conduit” will allow you to do so.
 There also certain measures and requirements you must
consider and comply with, before you leave Earth and enter
another dimension, and/or time-space sphere.
 For instance, selecting the correct time to revisit the past,
and/or another dimension is paramount.
 What “Ba’ab” (Door or entrance to the other world) shall you
enter?
 How shall you adapt, correct or adjust your vision in a new
dimension?
 How would you differentiate between an astral travel,
imagination, fantasy of your mind, and reality?
 Even in highly developed dimensions, and in many different
time/space spheres, you will encounter fantasy, tricks of the
mind, hallucinations, and fake apparitions.
 Many of the other dimensions (Plans) and time-space spheres
are similar to Earth, even though the structural composition
and their properties are enormously different.
 All these encounters, images and feelings will prevent your
mind from understanding what you are seeing. You will be
totally confused.
 For example, and let’s assume for now, that you have
managed to go back in time, and visit with people and societies
from the 18th century.
 First, how would you know, that the people you will see there
are indeed from the 18th century, and not people just like you,
visiting the past for the first time?
 Second, how would you guide yourself, direct yourself, and
reach your destination, without getting lost?
 Bear in mind, that in a different dimension, you will not have
enough time to find your way around, if you don’t have the map
of the afterlife, and parallel dimensions.
 Third, you will not be able to last long over there, because
your mind and your body will run out of energy.
 Besides, do you know how to charge and/or recharge
yourself?
 You will be facing incomprehensible situations similar to
ectoplasmic apparitions.
 Quite often, these ectoplasmic apparitions/projections
(Complete or partial) dissipate because the entity has rapidly
consumed its “apparition and manifestation energy.”
 Once you have completed your orientation program, and the
master has activated your “Conduit”, your trip to the past or to
another dimension will be successful and very beneficial.

*** *** ***

6. Revisiting your childhood in another dimension, in


another time:
Master Kanazawa explained this in one of his Kira’at
(Readings/Lectures).
Here is what he said to his students, verbatim, word for word, and
unedited:
 Copy of your childhood is still real and vivid in another
dimension.
 This image is still there. It is your image when you were a
child.
 It is physical and real.
 Even the toys and candies you loved are still there, and they
are real too.
 You can even touch those toys and play with them if you want.
 You can grab your favorite candies from the jar and eat one.
 Everything you see and taste is real.
 You are not hallucinating, and your mind is not playing tricks
on you.
 How can you be so sure?
 It is simple, and very convincing, because upon meeting
people you knew while you were child, you will be able to tell
them how did they live and what they did when they were
young like you, in the same town, around the same corner, and
even describe to them the kind of games you played with them
in the streets, in the school yard, and on the streets sidewalks.
 You will be able to tell them what they did on that particular
Sunday day, after the church service.
 But you will see it and enjoy it only once, because you might
not be able to return once again to that dimension.
 Sometime, it is so easy to enter the extra-dimension of your
youth, without training.
 Sometime, it happens, just like that, because you have
escaped the gravity of time on Earth.
 It is a sudden opening into your past.
 A past you have lived here on Earth, and was duplicated
somewhere else.
 Now, you are revising that “somewhere else”, and nobody is
going to recognize it, except you.
 You will recognize all the people you will be seeing and
meeting in that “somewhere elsewhere” dimension. But, they
will not recognize you.
 Even though, you give them very particular and personal
details about their lives, their habits, the place where they grew
up, the name of that school teacher they like, of that math
teacher they hated.
 Still, they will not believe that you are the one you claim or
pretend to be; a friend from their youth, a real friend from your
past, or their past; a past you really shared with them.
 But remember, there is always one person who will believe
you. And he is always around you.
 Perhaps, it is the other copy of yourself, or your guardian
angel?
 You will have the chance to meet that “other copy of yourself”
in some other time, and somewhere else…in another
dimension.
 The name of the store you are revisiting now in that
dimension has not changed. Perhaps, only the name of the
proprietor did. Because the former owner was already too old,
and he passed away some twenty years ago.
 You used to come to that store, sit on the stool, and talk to
Mr. Ted, the old owner of the store.
 “Mr. Ted passed away long time ago,” will tell you the man
standing behind the counter in the store.
 But the truth is, Mr. Ted is somewhere else now, exactly as
you are somewhere else, in other dimension.
 Something very strange will happen to you in that dimension.
You could see yourself as a child riding that beautiful old
carousel. Or perhaps chasing an old car.
 Those images are real. Because you will recognize them in
their most intimate details.
 Some other people will agree with you when you describe to
them the carousel you loved, the kind of cars people drove in
that small town, and the name of those teachers you have
mentioned.
 Yet, they will never believe you when you tell them, that you
grew up here, how you used to chase that old Impala Chevrolet
of Mr. Evans, and those treasured comics books you bought
from Mrs. Adams, who used to own the little bookstore around
the corner.
 It is up to you to believe what you are seeing or to totally
reject it.
 But if you reject it, you will never be able to revisit your youth,
and other worlds, small towns, and cities you lived in before.
 You begin to ask yourself, how did you get there? How did
you get here in the other dimension?
 You start to question your sanity.
 But you know deep down, you are not dreaming, and you are
not hallucinating, because the people you see are real, and they
walk and they talk like real people.
 Only their hairdo has changed, the fashion of their clothes is
old, old enough to send you back in time. The cars you see are
old too, they are 1930’s model. And the calligraphy style of the
names of the shops on windows and doors is old too.
 So what are you going to do in that strange place?
 You put your hands in your pockets, and you will find dimes
and nickels. Because that was all what you needed to buy an ice
cream or a candy.
 Then you begin to wonder why people are not believing you.
 You have told them true stories about people they knew,
stories about you and your parents, and about everything you
saw and you did when you were a child in that town.
 It is very likely, you will meet your parents before they were
married.
 You will recognize your mother, or at least your mother to be.
 You call her by her name, her maiden name and her married
name. You will scare her, and she will think you are insane.
 How would you or could you convince her you are her child?
 How would you convince her that she was the mother who fed
you, who clothed you and took you to the movie house “Rex”
with your sisters, and kept on telling you to keep quiet while
watching the movie, because you talked too much.
 You tell her all this, yet, she will not believe you.
 But just before you leave her, she feels something she can’t
explain.
 These encounters and deja vu experiences happened to many
people before.
 If you anchor them in your mind, in your “Conduit”, you will
be able to return and visit with them once again, but it will
happen in a different dimension.
 A dimension, where your mother is no longer your mother,
but possibly your date, or just another woman?
 Confusing? You bet.
 But this is what constitutes the fabric of time and space in
other dimensions. A time and a space that cease to exist in that
dimension.
 A dimension not very far from where you currently live.

7. The invisible quantum line dividing two space-time


dimensions:
 The invisible thin quantum line dividing two times capsules,
both located on the same plane, is usually the outer limit of two
dimensions.
 These two time-space dimensions are usually found in
isolated areas, such as distant valleys, fields, and spots on
Earth, rarely visited by the public.
 The two time-capsules represent two different time intervals
and all past events that occurred separately in each one of
them.
 Even sounds from past eras can be heard separately, coming
from each one of them.
 You can’t see the diving line. It is not visible to the naked eye.
 If you cross that line, you leave the time you are living in, and
you enter a different time-space.
 This is the time and space where you can change the past, but
rarely does it happen, unless in previous times, you were part of
the past, and/or have witnessed these events from the past.
 For instance, you are in 1974, on one time-capsule section of
the land (Field, desert, spot). You cross the line separating 1974
and another year, perhaps hundreds of years.
 You cross the line and you enter another time without
knowing it.
 Once in, you become part of the past, and a real person from
the past. You are as real as all the physical things you see before
your eyes.
 The events or scenes you will see are usually memorable,
meaningful, historical, or important events known to you. You
are very familiar with what you are currently seeing.
 They appear from nowhere, and since you have become part
of the past, these events become factual.
 Part of your mind will tell you that you know a lot about these
events, because you have read about these events, but you can’t
remember where and when.
 Another part of your mind convinces you that you are seeing
the true events as they have happened, or you are seeing the
events for the first time.
 This is a moment of confusion for you. But eventually you will
sort it out.
 Is it a mirage? A hallucination? A fantasy? Or the real thing?
Well, if you have stepped in the true time-capsule sphere, then,
what you are seeing is real, and what you are feeling is not
psychosomatic but truly physical.
 Many people have reported that some of their friends have
vanished walking this dividing line. And the missing persons
were never found, because they have entered another
dimension, never to return again.
 In the Anunnaki’s “Donia” (Spheres; world), there is no
hallucination, coincidence, fantasy, or psychosomatic effects.
Everything is tested and real.
 If for some reasons, the “Ba’ab” (Door; stargate) of time-space
opens up before you, and you were instantly transported or
absorbed into its dimension, you instantly become an
inseparable part of that dimension.
 You will relive the events and time of that dimension.
 If at the time, when you were transported, a battle was going
on, you become one of those men who are fighting in this
battle. Each scene that appears before your eyes will blend you
in its fabric and time-reality, and you will not be able to escape
its boundaries.
 How real are these events? They are real 100%.
 Are you really seeing a real battle? Affirmative.
 What if for some reasons you took part in this battle, is there
a possibility that you could get killed? Really killed?
 Absolutely. Because in that dimension, you are not a
spectator, or a visitor, but a real person transposed and
transported to a real battle field.
 It is hard, even impossible for humans to understand this
mystery. But it is happening for real in another dimension.
 Yes, you could die in that dimension, but you are still alive in
another one, because all of us live simultaneously in different
dimensions.
 Probably now you are asking whether the person who died in
that battle is in fact the same person who is still alive in 1978 or
1979 or even in the future.
 And my answer is yes. You are all these persons in all these
capsule-time spheres.
 You are the same person, but the properties of your body are
different, as dictated by each dimension respectively.
 Another time-scene might open before you, for example, an
old city market or bazaar. The shoppers, the stores, the goods,
and everything you see is real.
 You look at yourself and you realize that you are wearing
clothes of the era. Yet, part of your mind that has retained
space-time memory will tell you that you are living real events
and real time, but you are just visiting another time and space
in history.
 Then, if this is the scenario, can you go back to where you
came from? Yes, you can.
 One way to do it is by using the Gomatirach-minzari, and
similar techniques. (Note: See Gomatirach-minzari, on page 83
in the book “Ramadosh Book; 13 Anunnaki-Ulema Mind Power
Techniques to Live Longer, Happier, Healthier, Wealthier.)

8: Q&A:
At the end of Master Kanazawa’ Kira’at (Reading/Lecture), a young
student asked the Master: “Master, it is possible to bring with me,
something from that dimension I have visited, so when I tell my
friends about it they would believe me?”
“Of course you can,” replied the Master. “And this is how many
ancient artifacts were brought back to the present. Some ended in
the basements of museums, others dissipated in the doubtful minds
of humans who could live only once.”
Another young student asked Honorable Master Kanazawa: “Master,
you told us that sometimes, we enter a different dimension without
knowing how to do it. You said, it happens just like that. Why? And
if this happens just like that, then our “Conduit” does not need to be
activated to visit other worlds?”

The perplexed student paused for a short moment, and asked again:
“Master, when we get there, do we go to different levels in the same
dimension, or is it one single dimension we see all the time? And
how many different worlds can we visit in a single trip to the past or
to other dimensions?”

The Honorable Master replied (As is, verbatim, word for word, and
unedited):
 Everything depends on how your brain is wired.
 If your “Conduit” has been activated, then, you will know and
understand what is happening to you, and all the things you
will see in the other world(s) will be assimilated gradually by
your brain.
 To understand what it is actually happening there, and how
you got there, you have to visualize your mind as a tall building
with many floors.
 Inside the building, there is an elevator that goes all the way
to the highest floor.
 There is only one single elevator for all the people who enter
the building.
 Each floor represents one layer of that dimension (The other
world).
 This does not mean that the dimension you have entered has
sub-divisions or additional dimensions. Simply put, the
dimension is divided into multiple spheres, called layers.
 Each sphere gathers different kinds of people, eras,
knowledge, events, memories, sensations, cars, shops, streets,
so on.
 One floor could be the past universe and past time of the 18th
century. Another floor could be the 12th century. And another
floor could be the future.
 But for now, do not worry about all these centuries and the
future.
 Instead, let’s go back to the place on Earth, from which you
entered another dimension.
 There are two kinds of entrances to another world.
 The first one occurs through the activation of your “Conduit”.
And you know already how this happens.
 The second kind of entrance to another world is the
accidental one, which is the current situation you are in.
 Usually, the coincidental or accidental entrance to another
world occurs from spots and areas on Earth, that are not
heavily visited or frequented.
 So, let’s assume that you are in a distant field, a valley, a
prairie, whatever. And you are just walking in that field.
 For reasons, your mind cannot understand yet, time-space
pockets open up before you.
 Some scientists call these pockets vorteces.
 In our Ana’kh language, we call them “Ba’abs” (Doors,
entrances, time tunnels, etc.)
 When the “Ba’ab” accidentally opens up, a huge but narrow
tunnel appears before you.
 This tunnel takes the form of a spiral-wind; a sort of an
atmospheric turbulence.
 You will see it.
 You will feel its electro-magnetic field, and before you know
it, you are sucked up by its current.
 Once inside the tunnel, your will start to feel as if your body is
shrinking. Sometime, just the opposite.
 You will feel as if your body is stretching out intensely.
 Everything depends on the intensity of the tunnel’s vacuum
power.
 In all cases, you will be transported immediately, to another
dimension that resembles the building I told you about before.
 The vacuum power, the tunnel’s magnetic field, and the
opening of the “Ba’ab”, all these phenomena are caused by
atmospheric anomalies conditioned and created by the collision
of time-space plates.
 For now, consider these time-space plates as the tectonic
plates of the Earth, that have caused the Earth to shift so many
times throughout the centuries, and to change the superficies,
shapes, and locations of continents, oceans, mountains, so on.
 The time-space plates, although invisible to the naked eye,
exist at the entrance and borders of all dimensions existing in
the universe.
 You can consider them as the landmark(s) of multiple
universes.
 When the plates collide, or bump into each other, a
time/space-vacuum tunnel opens up immediately.
 In this very particular time/space-vacuum tunnel, all things,
physical and non-physical lose their original and primordial
properties.
 This means, that your body entering this vacuum is no longer
the same body you had on Earth.
 The molecules change.
 Your Nahpsiya (DNA in modern scientific language) is
altered.
 The weight and size of your body change instantly.
 In brief, what you retain in you, is only a spatial memory, a
sort of a small recollection of things and events that happened
to you on Earth.
 Now, you are inside the tunnel.
 Your body zooms inside the tunnel at the speed of light.
 This incomprehensible speed allows you to travel to the edge
of the universe.
 And this travel includes all the dimensions and other worlds
that have existed and/or shall exist in the future.
 You might land in a world that has existed in the past.
 Once you land there, you will not be able to understand
everything you see. But you will realize very clearly, that you
are now in a different and a real world.
 Now, we go back to the tall building I told you about before.
 It is very important to remember that building, because we
are going to use it as a representation of the other world you are
facing now.
 Very good. Now you are right in front of the tall building.
 If you stay in the street, outside the building, you will see only
one dimension.
 This dimension could be Egypt in the 3rd century B.C., or
Paris in the 18th century. It does not matter.
 Now, you decide to enter the building. You go straight to the
elevator and you push the second floor button.
 Very good. The door of the elevator opens up, you step out,
and you enter the second floor.
 Although this second floor is still in the same building, the
time-space has changed.
 This means, that you are entering another era, another
century of Egypt or Paris.
 The place (Country, in this case) does not change.
 You are still in Egypt or in Paris, depending where you have
landed first. Egypt is still Egypt. And Paris is still Paris. But the
time (Century, in this case) has changed.
 You will get used to it, when you progress in your study.
 Let’s assume that you have decided now to take the elevator
to the 1oth floor.
 What are you going to see on the 1oth floor?
 Certainly, neither Egypt or Paris, or anything else you saw on
other floors. It is going to be another country.
 What is happening here is this: You are not entering a
dimension that represents other worlds from outer space, or
beyond the solar system, or beyond the metaphysical world.
 You are still on Earth, but in different time-space intervals,
eras, centuries, and possibly locations that no longer exist.
 This is exactly what the building represents.
 And this is exactly what we call going back in time.
*** *** ***

76. Spathe of the Male Date-Palm


“Lagishimmar”, “Lagi-zulum”

Also called the deity’s hand-bucket.

1. Definition and introduction


2. Symbolism
3. Esoteric and magical use

________________

If you look carefully at the sculptures of the gods and kings of Sumer,
Babylon, Mesopotamia, Assyria, Chaldea, so on, you will notice that
they always carry something in their hands; a sort of a handbag, a
purse, perhaps a bucket? Did you ever wonder why? First, what is
“this thing?”
Second, why “this thing” was so important to them? In their
Ana’kh/Ulemite language, the Anunnaki-Ulema call “this thing”
Lagishimmar “Lagi-zulum”.

1. Definition and introduction:


Lagishimmar “Lagi-zulum” means and represents the “Spathe of the
Male Date-Palm.” A symbol for:
 a-A fertile agriculture;
 b- Lands and civilization prosperity;
 c- Cure for many diseases and illnesses.

From Lagishimmar “Lagi-zulum”, derived:


The Old Babylonian/Mesopotamian, Chaldean and Sumerian words:
 a- Zulum, which means date;
 b- Gishimmar, which means a date palm.

*** *** ***


A winged God or Genius holding the “Spathe of the Male Date-
Palm.”

______________________

2. Symbolism:
Lagishimmar “Lagi-zulum” (Spathe of the Male Date-Palm)
appeared on many ancient Sumerian, Akkadian, Mesopotamian and
Babylonian sculptures, obelisks, inscriptions, texts, clay tablets, and
cylinders, such as:
 1-The “Eagle-Headed Deity” 883-59 B.C.;
A traditional Mesopotamian, Neo-Assyrian eagle-headed,
representing a winged divinity, standing before the Babylonian Tree
of Life.
Originally, it was an ornamental carving from a wall in the royal
palace of king Nimrud, which was built by the legendary
Assurnasirpal II, King of Assyria.

The eagle-headed deity is holding a spathe of date (Palm) tree in one


hand, and a bucket in the other. In many instances, both the “bucket”
and the Spathe” represent the same thing, such as agriculture
development, fertility of the lands of Mesopotamia, and a royal
authority.
In other words, it depicts the political power and prosperity of
Mesopotamia (Assyria, Chaldea).

 2-The “Cylinder Seal with the Winged Su Disk” (White Calcite


Cylinder Seal 3200-3000 B.C. Mesopotamia.)

 3-The Khorsabad Deity holding a flowing vase”, Iraq;


Khorsabad, Nabu Temple; Neo-Assyrian Period; Reign of
Sargon II, 721-705 B.C. Gypsum. Excavated by the Oriental
Institute, in 1932-33.

 4- The Legend of Oannes.

 5- The “Winged figure from the palace of Sargon of Akkad,” in


Assyria.
According to G. Maspero, he appears to be holding something which
he has just plucked from a sacred plant or tree and has sometimes
been described as a fir cone, a sponge, the “Spathe of the Male Date-
Palm”.

 6- Additional illustrations of the bucket or the vessel


appeared on inscriptions, cylinders, and statues of Tiglath
Pileser, Sargon, Markuk, Sennacherib, Nimrud, Sardanapalus,
Nebuchadnezzar, Asshur (Assur), Shalmaneser, Neriglissar,
Nabonidus, Assurbanipal, ShamaspPhul, and Esar Haddon, so
on.

Originally and essentially, it represented the “Tree of Life”, and


became a symbol of:
 a-Royal authority,
 b-The visible wealth of a nation,
 c-Settlement and development of societies,
 d-Power of a kingdom,
 e-A national pride,
 f-And above all, the “Tree of Life”.

The “Tree of Life” is the “physical chart, the DNA sequences, and the
direct link between humans and their creators, the Anunnaki and the
Igigi,” said Ulema Al Baydani Tamer bin abi Sufian, and Ulema Saber
bin Thabet Al Ghazali.

According to very ancient Near Eastern oral traditions, generated by


the Gnostics, and the bishops of early Eastern Christianity in
Anatolia, Antioch (Intaquieh), Konia, Adana, Aleppo, Maalula,
Kaamishli, Izmir, and Sa’ad-Neyah, the “Solomon’s Juice”, called in
Arabic and proto-Aramaic “Suleiman Shiraab”, was the Elixir of Life,
wrongly nicknamed ORME by contemporary authors.

*** *** ***

3. Esoteric and magical use by the Anunnaki-Ulema:


The early Anunnaki Ulema used the “Deity’s Hand- Bucket”, as their
secret logo. It appeared in the archaic inscriptions and texts of the
“Brotherhood of Melkart”, the “Circle of the Fish”, the “Serpent
Society”, in Ugarit, Amrit, Tyre, and Sidon, on the lost cylinder-ring
of King Solomon, and particularly in the diagrams of the “Book of
Ramadosh.”
Symbolically, the “Bucket” represented the water of life; the source of
life; the source of all knowledge.

Centuries later, the Anunnaki-Ulema’s “Bucket” was introduced in


the ancient literature of Babylon, Mesopotamia, Assyria, Chaldea,
Sumer and the lands of the Hittites in Anatolia, and frequently used
by the gods and kings of the ancient world of the Near East and the
Middle East.
Almost, every Babylonian King had his own “Bucket”. And
frequently, the Mesopotamian/Babylonian gods, the ancient deities
of the region, the monarchs of the ancient Middle/Near East were
depicted on cylinders and tablets holding a bucket.

According to the “Book of Ramadosh,” the “Bucket” contained the


elixir of life. And in secret ritual ceremonies held on the Island of
Arwad, Ugarit, Tyre, Sidon, Byblos and inside the Temple of
Solomon, and the palace of Hiram, drops of water from the “Bucket”
were used as Za’apharan, a sort of a yellowish writing ink, invisible to
the naked eye. Such practice was not part of magical rituals, but
prescriptions of secret extraterrestrial techniques which developed
supernatural powers.
The Za’apharan was also used in the early Arabian magic ceremonies
and spirits séances, to write down the secret and powerful names of
Allah (The Muslim God), the Al Arwah (The spirits), and the Jinns.
The divine names were written on a magical circle drawn on the
floor, and/or waxed parchment-papers. The word Za’apharan is not a
linguistic fantasy. It did exist in the ancient literature of the Near
East and the Middle East.
As a matter of fact, Za’apharan is still use in many modern Eastern
languages, including Turkish, Persian, Arabic and Syriac (Syriani).

*** *** ***


77. A tool to Rewind the Past and the Future
“Lamada-burkadi”

Definition:
An instrument that functions and operates as a camera and a
projector. It has a lens and two knobs; one for rewinding the past,
the other for projecting the future.
It works like this: It projects events that have occurred in the past,
yet these events were captured by the lens of the camera existing in
the future.

*** *** ***

78. Metaphysical Visual Stethoscope


“Lamadru”


Definition:
Ulema de Lafayette compared it to a “metaphysical visual
stethoscope”, used to measure the distance between a physical body
and the “Double”.
One of its functions is to restore health, and equilibrium between the
physical and the mental.

*** *** ***

79. Announcement of your Death


“Latabi”, “Ma-ari”
I. Definition
II. Ulema Al Baydani explains

________________

I. Definition:
A term for the experience of encountering or seeing yourself, as a
duplicate image of your body. Some Ulema reluctantly called this
phenomenon “Announcement of your death.”

II. Ulema Al Baydani explains:


Ulema Al Baydani commented on this. He said verbatim:
 This is not a good sign.
 Usually the projection of the image of one’s body predicts
either a fatal event to occur in the very near future, or his/her
death within hours or a few days.
 Pets can easily see this image.
 It is not physical, however it appears very clear to the naked
eye.
 The image takes the form of a ghost looking at you.
 The ghost moves like a real person.
 Usually you see confusion and sadness on the face of the
ghost.
 This is not hallucination or a trick of your mind.
 It is a holographic projection of an event to occur.
 In other words, your mind (The Supersymetric Mind) can
sense and pre-visualize events before they happen.
 It is like reading a calendar backward; from the end, instead
from the very first day of the month.
 It is a rare occurrence, but it happens now and then.

*** *** ***


80. The Image of the Bodies of People Who
Have Passed Away
“Lakur-bashar-shabah”
“Mah.Ga.Ri”


I. Definition
II. Etymology

____________________

I. Definition:
The projection of the images of the bodies of people who have passed
away. Yet, at a certain time interval, in an adjacent parallel
dimension, the continuity of their physical existence is a real, as the
one they had while still alive on earth.

II. Etymology:
Worth mentioning here that:
 1-Bashar is an Anunnaki word for humans. Bashar was one of
the primordial words, the Anunnaki geneticists used to refer to
their genetic creatures. These creatures were the prototype of
the first human beings. More precisely, the first quasi-human
creatures. In addition to Bashar, other names were used, such
Adama, Ada-mah, Naffar, etc.
 2- The word Shabah means ghost or phantom in Arabic. It is
still used in the Arabic language, and particularly in the Arabic
Sihr (Arabic Magic) literature.
In its Anunnaki-Ulemite original context, Shabah meant the etheric
energy diffused by your physical body. It could be seen as a real
entity in the “next dimension”, the one that follows the third
dimension which is Earth.
On Earth, Shabbah resembles Latabi, but after the event of one’
death has occurred.

*** *** ***

81. Reappearance of Objects Which Are No


Longer in Existence
Lakur-shabah”
“Mah.Ri.Nag”

I. Definition
II. Etymology
_______________

I. Definition:
Lakur-shabah is a term or a word for a place or an object that has
existed once upon a time, but it seems to reappear somehow,
somewhere to some people. Such a place could be an old street, a
shop from another century, etc.
An object could be a ship from the old times, an archeological statue,
or even the face of a deity.

II. Etymology:
Lakur-shabah is composed of three words:

 a-La, which means no. (Same meaning in Sumerian,


Akkadian, Assyrian, proto-Aramaic, and Arabic.)
 b-Kur, which means a place, a land, a field, a region. (Same
meaning in Sumerian, Akkadian, Assyrian and Old
Babylonian.)
 c-Shabah, which means a ghost. (Same meaning in Arabic.)
*** *** ***

PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA


Published by
UFOs & Supernatural Magazine
New York
2012

You might also like